JP6719005B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

As a representative gaming machine of this type, variable display is performed, and when the display result is a specific display result (big hit pattern), it is possible to control to an advantageous state (big hit state) advantageous to the player. Things are known.

In this type of gaming machine, the variable display which has not been started yet is stored in the variable display as the pending storage, and the pending storage is displayed as the pending display.

Some conventional gaming machines execute an effect that changes the mode of the hold display in multiple stages (see Patent Document 1). Further, some conventional gaming machines are capable of performing a variation correspondence display (active display) corresponding to the variation display during execution of the variation display. In addition, there is also a gaming machine that performs an effect of executing both the change of the display of the variation corresponding display and the change of the display of the hold display (see Patent Document 2).

JP, 2011-212304, A JP, 2014-113174, A

However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is room for improvement in terms of enhancing the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the enjoyment of the game.

(A) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that can perform variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state (big hit gaming state or the like) that is advantageous to the player,
Reservation storage means for storing, as a reservation storage, information related to the variable display that has not been started yet (first special figure reservation storage section 151A, second special figure reservation storage section 151B, first start winning command reception command buffer 194A, second start) Received command buffer at the time of winning 194B),
Hold display means capable of displaying a hold display corresponding to the hold storage stored by the hold storage means (image display device 5, RAM 102, first start winning prize memory display area 5HL, second starting prize winning memory display area 5HR, etc.),
A holding mode changing unit (a CPU 120 for effect control, S532 of FIG. 25, etc.) capable of changing the mode of the holding display before the variable display based on the target holding storage is executed,
Corresponding display means (production control CPU 120, S532 in FIG. 25, etc.) capable of performing corresponding display (active display, etc.) corresponding to the variable display during execution of the variable display,
During the execution of the variable display, a common effect that is commonly executed when the mode of the corresponding display is changed and when the mode of the corresponding display is not changed (for example, in the first system change effect, the graphic group Y1 is Effects before colliding with the active display, and effects in the second system change effect until the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame surrounding the active display), and the mode of the corresponding display after executing the common effect. (For example, in the first system change effect, an effect in which a figure of one of the shapes “stars” in the figure group Y1 collides with the active display to change to a star display mode, or a second system change effect) In, the effect that the line Y of the active display frame changes due to the arrow Y2 colliding with the active display frame, or both the first system change effect and the second system change effect are executed to perform the active display or the active display. Effects that change the display mode of the frame or the like) or failure effects that do not change the mode of the corresponding display (for example, in the first system change effect, a graphic of one of the shapes "star" of the graphic group Y1 collides with the active display). In the effect in which the display mode of the active display does not change before it is activated, or in the second system change effect, the arrow Y2 disappears before the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame, and the line thickness of the active display frame That does not change, or an effect that does not change the display mode of one or both of the active display and the active display frame by executing both the first system change effect and the second system change effect) with an execution unit, the,
The effect execution means,
One of the plurality of timings including the first timing during the execution of the one variable display and the second timing subsequent to the first timing, the success effect is set according to which timing the common effect is executed. The rate of execution is different,
When the common effect is executed at the second timing, the success effect is executed at a higher rate than when the common effect is executed at the first timing.
The correspondence display means can perform the correspondence display in a plurality of modes including a normal mode and a special mode different from the normal mode as the correspondence display,
When the corresponding display of the special embodiment is performed, wherein the common effect is Ru runs at a higher rate than when the corresponding display of the normal mode is performed, the gaming machine.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

(1) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state or the like) that is advantageous to the player,
Reservation storage means for storing, as a reservation storage, information related to the variable display that has not been started yet (first special figure reservation storage section 151A, second special figure reservation storage section 151B, first start winning command reception command buffer 194A, second start) Received command buffer at the time of winning 194B),
Hold display means capable of displaying a hold display corresponding to the hold storage stored by the hold storage means (image display device 5, RAM 102, first start winning prize memory display area 5HL, second starting prize winning memory display area 5HR, etc.),
Holding mode changing means (effect control CPU 120, S532 of FIG. 25, etc.) capable of changing the mode of the pending display a plurality of times before the variable display based on the target pending storage is executed;
A variation-corresponding display means (production control CPU 120, S532, etc. in FIG. 25) capable of performing variation-correspondence display (active display, etc.) corresponding to the variation display during execution of the variation display,
During the execution of the variable display, a common effect that is commonly executed when the mode of the variable corresponding display is changed and when the mode of the variable corresponding display is not changed (for example, in the first system change effect, the graphic group The effect before Y1 collides with the active display, and the effect until the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame surrounding the active display in the second system change effect), and after the common effect is executed, the variation is dealt with. Successful effect that changes the display mode (for example, in the first system change effect, an effect in which one of the shapes “star” in the figure group Y1 collides with the active display to change to the star display mode, In the system change effect, the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame to change the line thickness of the active display frame, or both the first system change effect and the second system change effect are executed to perform active display. Or an effect that changes the display mode of the active display frame or the like) or a failure effect that does not change the mode of the change-corresponding display (for example, in the first system change effect, any shape “star” of the graphic group Y1 is displayed in the active display). In the effect in which the figure disappears before the collision and the display mode of the active display does not change, or in the second system change effect, the arrow Y2 disappears before the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame and the active display frame A production in which the thickness of the line is not changed, or a production in which both the first system change production and the second system change production are executed and one or both of the active display frame and the display mode is not changed). Equipped with an executable production execution means,
The variation correspondence display means, when the mode of the hold display changes a plurality of times (stepwise change of the display mode of the hold display by the characters A to D in the hold stage effect as shown in FIGS. 40(A) to (D)). ), during execution of the variable display corresponding to the hold display, the variable corresponding display capable of specifying the change mode of the mode is performed a plurality of times (A to D as shown in FIGS. 26B and 40E). Active display that displays the characters collectively),
The effect execution means,
One of the plurality of timings including the first timing during the execution of the one variable display and the second timing subsequent to the first timing, the success effect is set according to which timing the common effect is executed. The rate of execution is different,
A gaming machine in which, when the common effect is executed at the second timing, the success effect is executed at a higher rate than when the common effect is executed at the first timing.
With such a configuration, the player can confirm the change in the mode of the hold display.

With this configuration, it is possible to focus attention on the execution timing of the common effect. Also, by paying attention to the execution timing, the player's expectation can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The effect in which the mode of the hold display changes a plurality of times is selected from among a plurality of kinds of effects (hold display by the red character and hold display by the blue character shown in FIGS. 24 and 26), and the effect type is changed. The rate of change in the mode of the hold display differs depending on the hold display by the red character and the hold display by the blue character, as shown in the determined ratios of FIGS. 24(C), (D), (F), and (G). Then, the selection rate with change and the selection rate without change, which are the rates at which the pending display changes, are different).

With such a configuration, the interest of the player can be improved by attracting the player's attention to the mode of the hold display.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The variation-corresponding display means changes the display area in which the variation-corresponding display is performed when a specific effect (for example, super reach effect or the like) is executed in the variable display (FIG. 41(B), FIG. 42 ( B) etc.).

With such a configuration, it is possible to attract the player's attention to a particular effect.
(4) In the gaming machine of (3) above,
The variation-corresponding display means displays a part of the variation-corresponding display when a specific effect is executed in the variation display (only a part of the active display area AHA as shown in FIG. 41B). By displaying only a part of the group display of A to D characters, or by displaying a reduced size of the active display area AHA as shown in FIG. 42B, only a part of the group display of A to D characters is displayed. Is displayed) to change the display area in which the variation correspondence display is performed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the attention to the variation correspondence display and to attract the player's attention to the specific effect.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an aspect of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example etc of contents of production control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the game random number counted by the main board side. It is a figure which illustrates a variation category and a variation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a jackpot type determination table. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a data holding area for game control. It is the figure which shows the constitution example and the like of production control pattern. It is the block diagram etc which shows the constitution example of the data retention area for production control. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the timer interruption processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the starting winning a prize decision processing in the special design process treatment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart etc. which show an example of a random number value determination process at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of selection of a variation category determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a variation category determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a figure which shows the example of setting of the determination rate of a fluctuation pattern. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of command analysis processing. It is the flowchart which shows production control process treatment. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the winning a prize production decision processing in the production control process treatment. It is a figure which shows the example of setting of the determination rate of the display mode of a hold display. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing. It is the figure which shows the production pattern table at the time of reservation selection. It is a figure which shows the example of setting of the determination rate of the production aspect at the time of active display change production execution. It is a figure which shows the example of setting of the determination rate by the performance execution timing determination table at the time of 1st system change production execution. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the other setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of a hold display. It is a figure which shows the other example of a setting of the determination rate by the active display change production execution presence/absence determination table. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination rate by the 1st system detailed pattern determination table at the time of 1st system change production execution. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the change of a hold display, and an active display. It is a figure showing a change of active display before and after development to a super reach production (example which displays only a part). It is a figure which shows the change of the active display before and after the development to super reach production (the example which carries out a reduction display).

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. On the game board 2, a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails is formed. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into it.

A normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided in the lower part of the game area of the game board 2. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball device 6B has a pair of movable blades that are changed by the solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. 2 between a normal open state in a vertical position and an expanded open state in a tilted position. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and a start area (second start area) second start winning opening is formed.

As an example, in the normal variable winning ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the off state, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning hole. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball passes through the second starting winning port by the tilt control in which the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the ON state. It will be in an enlarged open state that is easy to enter. Although the normal variable winning ball device 6B allows the game ball to enter the second starting winning port even in the normally open state, the game ball may enter more than in the expanded opening state. It may be configured to be low. Alternatively, the normal variable winning ball device 6B may be configured so that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening in the normally open state. As described above, the second starting winning opening as the second starting area is in an enlarged open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and in a normally opened state in which the game ball is difficult to pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter). Changes to.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. 2, for example. The winning when the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A is referred to as a first starting winning. In addition, the winning when the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B is referred to as a second starting winning.

A predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls based on the fact that the game balls that have passed through (entered) the first starting winning opening are detected by the first starting opening switch 22A (based on the occurrence of the first starting winning prize). Is paid out as a prize ball, and if the first special figure reservation storage number (described later) is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), the first special symbol executed in the first special symbol display device 4A A first starting condition (also referred to as a first execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as a game (described later) or a variable display (described later) of a decorative pattern executed on the image display device 5 is established. A predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls that have passed (entered) the second start winning opening are detected by the second start opening switch 22B (based on the occurrence of the second starting winning opening). While the game ball is paid out as a prize ball, if the second special figure reservation storage number (described later) is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), the second special symbol display device 4B is executed. A second start condition (also referred to as a second execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game (described later) or a variable display (described later) of a decorative pattern executed on the image display device 5 is established. The number of prize balls paid out based on the first start prize and the number of prize balls paid out based on the second start prize may be the same or different from each other.

The first special figure reservation storage number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the first starting prize) that are not immediately executed when the first starting prize is generated and are temporarily suspended for execution. Even if the first start condition for executing the variable display game such as the first special figure game (described later) or the variable display of decorative symbols (described later) is satisfied due to the occurrence of the first start prize, the first start When the first start condition that allows the start of the above-described variable display game due to the occurrence of a prize is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition that was previously satisfied is being executed). If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is suspended (the variable display game is in a waiting state). In other words, the first special figure reservation storage number is the number of variable display games due to the occurrence of the first start winning awaiting execution. The number of the 1st special figure reservation storage decreases one by one whenever one 1st start condition is materialized.

Information regarding the variable display corresponding to the first starting prize, in which the first starting condition according to a certain first starting prize is satisfied, but the first starting condition for allowing the start of the variable display game according to the first starting prize is not satisfied Is stored (held) as hold data (first special figure hold information) until the first start condition that allows the start of the variable display game with the first start winning is satisfied. In other words, the held first special figure suspension information is consumed one by one each time the first start condition is satisfied, and the variable display game is executed based on the digested first special figure suspension information.

The second special figure hold storage number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the second start prize) that are temporarily not executed immediately after the occurrence of the second start prize and are suspended. Even if the second start condition for executing the variable display game such as the second special figure game (described later) or the variable display of decorative symbols (described later) is satisfied due to the occurrence of the second start winning, the second start is performed. When the second start condition that allows the start of the above-described variable display game due to the occurrence of a prize is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition that was previously satisfied is being executed). If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is suspended (the variable display game is in a waiting state). That is, the second special figure reservation storage number is the number of variable display games due to the occurrence of the second start winning awaiting execution. The second special figure reservation storage number is decreased by one each time one of the second start conditions is satisfied.

Information regarding the variable display corresponding to the second starting prize, in which the second starting condition according to a certain second starting prize is satisfied, but the second starting condition for allowing the start of the variable display game according to the second starting prize is not satisfied Is stored (held) as hold data (second special figure hold information) until the second start condition that allows the start of the variable display game with the second start winning is satisfied. In other words, the held second special figure suspension information is consumed one by one each time the second start condition is satisfied, and the variable display game is executed based on the digested second special figure suspension information.

When the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as "starting winning opening". In addition, when the first start prize and the second start prize are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as "start prize". In addition, the number of reserved storages obtained by adding the first special figure reserved storage number and the second special figure reserved storage number is referred to as "total reserved storage number". When the first special figure reservation storage number, the second special figure reservation storage number, and the total reservation storage number are not particularly distinguished, they are usually simply referred to as "special figure reservation storage number", but simply "special figure reservation". When referred to as "memory number", it may refer to any one or two of the first special figure pending storage number, the second special figure pending storage number, and the total pending storage number. Further, when the first starting condition and the second starting condition are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as “starting condition” or “execution condition”. In addition, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as “start condition”. Further, the first special figure reservation information and the second special figure reservation information are also simply referred to as “special figure reservation information” unless particularly distinguished.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in a lower portion of the game area of the game board 2 (below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B). The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and serves as a specific area that is changed to an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. Form a big winning hole.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the OFF state, the special winning opening door closes the special winning opening, and the game ball passes through (enters) the special winning opening. Disable it. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the ON state, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball passes through (enters) the special winning opening. ) Make it easier. In this way, the special winning opening as a specific area changes between an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state where the game ball cannot pass (entry) and is disadvantageous to the player. To do. Instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) the special winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) the special winning opening may be provided.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is detected by the count switch 23 shown in FIG. 2, for example. Based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the large winning opening that is opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, the game ball is opened to another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. More prize balls are paid out than when they passed (entered). Therefore, when the special winning opening is opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, the game ball can enter the special winning opening, which is the first state advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed, it is impossible or difficult to get the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball into the special winning opening The second state is disadvantageous for the person.

A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided on the right side of the game area on the game board 2. The first special symbol display device 4A is composed of, for example, a 7-segment or dot-matrix LED (light emitting diode) or the like. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The first special symbol display device 4A variably displays a special symbol (also referred to as "special symbol") that is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can identify each (called variable display or variable display). To do. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The special symbols (special symbols) variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as “first special symbols”, and the special symbols (special symbols) variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are “special symbols”. It is also referred to as "second special view". A game executed with variable display of identification information (or a variable display of identification information itself) is called a variable display game. In particular, the variable display game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A (variable display game for variably displaying the first special symbol) is also referred to as a first special symbol game, and the variable display game executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. The (variable display game in which the second special figure is variably displayed) is also referred to as a second special figure game. Further, when the first special figure game and the second special figure game are not distinguished from each other, they are simply referred to as “special figure game”.

The first special symbol display device 4A (similarly to the second special symbol display device 4B) has a plurality of types of numbers including "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-" as a special figure game. Variable display of special symbols. A symbol number corresponding to each special symbol is attached to each special symbol. As an example, if each of the numbers indicating “0” to “9” is given a symbol number of “0” to “9”, and if the symbol of “−” is given a symbol number of “10” Good. The special symbols are not limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns (for example, lighting patterns such as L and E of the alphabet) in which the combination of turning on and turning off the 7-segment LED are different are set in advance, and as special symbols. It may be displayed.

On the right side of the game area on the game board 2 (the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B), the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B are provided. .. The first hold indicator 25A is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the first special figure hold storage number (the first special figure game hold number) based on the hold data (first special figure hold information). A first hold display is displayed to enable display. For example, the first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold storage number in a identifiable manner by the number of LEDs to be turned on. For example, when the holding number of the first special figure game is increased by 1 by the establishment of the new first starting condition, the number of lights is increased by 1, and the first special figure game is suspended by the establishment of the new first start condition. If the number of lights decreases by one, the number of lights may be decreased by one. The second hold indicator 25B is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the second special figure hold storage number (the hold number of the second special figure game) based on the hold data (second special figure hold information). A second hold display for enabling display is performed. For example, the second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold storage number so that it can be specified by the number of LEDs to be turned on. For example, when the holding number of the second special figure game is increased by one by the establishment of the new second starting condition, the number of lights is increased by one, and the second special figure game is put on hold by the establishment of the new second starting condition. If the number of lights decreases by one, the number of lights may be decreased by one.

On the left side of the game area on the game board 2, there are provided a passage gate 41, a normal symbol display device 20, and a universal symbol reservation display device 25C. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by, for example, the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21, if the number of stored ordinary figures (described later) is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), the normal symbol display 20 The universal figure starting condition for executing the universal figure game (described later) executed in step 1 is established.

Normally, the symbol display device 20 is composed of 7-segment or dot-matrix LEDs and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The normal symbol display device 20 variably displays (variable display) a normal symbol (also referred to as "general symbol" or "ordinary symbol") that is a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. The variable display game in which the normal symbols are variably displayed is also referred to as a normal figure game (or "normal figure game"). Information relating to the universal figure game in which the universal figure start condition is satisfied but the universal figure start condition (described later) is not stored is stored (held) as suspension data (public figure suspension information).

The universal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure reserves based on the hold data (public figure hold information), for example, by the number of LEDs to be turned on. The number of ordinary figure holding memory is the number of ordinary figure games which are not executed immediately when the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 and whose execution is temporarily held. Even if the universal figure starting condition for executing the universal figure game is established by the detection of the game ball by the gate switch 21, if the universal figure starting condition that allows the start of the universal figure game is not established ( For example, when the previously established universal figure game is being executed), the execution of the relevant universal figure game is suspended (the relevant universal figure game is in a waiting state for execution). That is, the number of public figure reservation storages is the number of game of the general figure game in the state of waiting for execution. The number of stored universal figure reservations decreases by one each time one universal figure start condition is satisfied.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images.

In the display area of the image display device 5, a decorative pattern display area is arranged. In the decorative pattern display area, a decorative pattern that is a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) capable of identifying each is variably displayed (also referred to as variable display). The variable display of the decoration identification information (decorative pattern) is also included in the variable display game. The image display device 5, the first special symbol game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A (special figure game using the first special symbol), or the second special symbol executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. Corresponding to the game (special figure game using the second special figure), variable display of a plurality of types of decorative patterns is executed in the display area (decorative pattern display area).

As an example, as shown in FIG. 1, in the display area of the image display device 5, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged. Corresponding to the start of any special figure game of the first special figure game or the second special figure game, that is, corresponding to the start of fluctuation of any special figure of the first special figure or the second special figure Then, in each of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of the decorative design (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. After that, in response to the end of the special drawing game, that is, in response to the stop display of the special drawing, in each of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, the decorative design that becomes the variable display result (the fixed design, the final design (Also referred to as a stop symbol) is stopped and displayed. That is, in the display area (decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R) of the image display device 5, the variation of the decorative design is started in association with (corresponding to) the first special figure game (or the second special figure game), The fixed decorative design (also called the final stop design) is stopped and displayed.

The decorative pattern is, for example, 8 types of patterns (alphanumeric characters "1" to "8" or Chinese numerals, English characters, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and character images). Etc., and the character image may be, for example, a person, an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or a decorative image showing any other figure). A symbol number corresponding to each decorative pattern is attached to each decorative pattern. As an example, each of the alphanumeric characters indicating "1" to "8" may be assigned a symbol number of "1" to "8". Note that the decorative patterns are not limited to eight types, and may be of any type (eg, seven types or nine types) as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a big hit combination and a lost combination can be configured.

Variable display result of special symbols (also called special symbol display result) Stop display to stop and display the fixed special symbol and end the variable display, and fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) which is variable display result of decorative symbol Stop display to stop and display the variable display, and stop display to display the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result (also referred to as general figure display result) of the normal symbol and stop the variable display, It is also referred to as a stop display, a final stop display, or a derivation display (or simply “derivation”). The variation start timing and variation end timing of the decorative symbol do not necessarily have to match the variation start timing and variation end timing of the special symbol, and within the variation time (special symbol variation time) of the special symbol, It suffices if the change time is settled.

That is, the variation start timing of the decorative symbol may be later than the variation start timing of the special symbol, and the variation end timing of the special symbol (stop display timing of the fixed special symbol) is the variation end timing of the decorative symbol (stop of the fixed symbol) It may be later than the display timing). For example, the execution of the predetermined effect may be started after the fixed decorative design is stopped and displayed, and the fixed special symbol may be stopped and displayed at the end of the execution of the predetermined effect. An example of the predetermined effect is a simple hold effect (described later) that is one mode of the hold effect (described later).

Further, a stop display different from the complete stop display (final stop display, derived display) may be displayed. For example, the decorative design may be temporarily stopped and displayed during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the derivation display of the fixed decorative design. In the temporary stop display, a decorative pattern whose fluctuation speed is “0” is displayed for a while, for example, while causing a slight shake or expansion/contraction, or is shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). It includes those that stop and display without causing time, slight shaking, stretching, etc.

Further, in the display area of the image display device 5, a first starting prize winning memory display area 5HL and a second starting winning prize memory display area 5HR are arranged. In the first starting prize winning memory display area 5HL, as with the first reserved display device 25A, the first reserved display for displaying the first special figure reserved memory number in a identifiable manner is performed. That is, the number of the first special figure games that are currently being executed is displayed so that they can be specified. In the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL, the second hold display for displaying the second special figure hold storage number in a identifiable manner is performed, as in the second hold display 25B. That is, the number of the second special figure games which are currently being executed is displayed so that they can be specified.

In addition, in the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL, the first hold display may be performed, for example, right-justified. That is, when the number of holdings of the first special figure game increases due to the establishment of the new first starting condition, if there is no other first holding display in the first starting winning prize memory display area 5HL, the first starting winning prize memory display is displayed. On the right side of the area 5HL (the center side of the display area of the image display device 5), a new first hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the increased first special figure hold information, and the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL is added. If there is another first hold display in the above, the new first hold is displayed on the left side of the other first hold display (if there are a plurality of other first hold displays, further left side of the leftmost first hold display). Additional displays may be added. In addition, when there are a plurality of first hold indications in the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL and the hold number of the first special figure game decreases due to the establishment of the new first start condition, the first amount of decrease The first hold display (the first hold display displayed from the oldest) displayed on the rightmost side of the first start prize winning memory display area 5HL corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special figure hold information is erased, Each of the other first hold displays is moved (shifted) to the erased first hold display side (right side).

Further, in the second starting prize winning memory display area 5HR, for example, the second hold display may be performed by left-justifying. That is, when the number of holdings of the second special figure game increases due to the establishment of the new second starting condition, if there is no other second holding display in the second starting winning prize memory display area 5HR, the second starting winning prize memory display is displayed. On the left side of the area 5HR (the center side of the display area of the image display device 5), a new second hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the increased second special figure hold information, and the second start winning a prize memory display area 5HR is added. If there is another second hold display in the above, the new second hold is displayed on the right side of the other second hold display (if there are a plurality of other second hold displays, further right side of the rightmost second hold display). Additional displays may be added.

In addition, when there are a plurality of second hold indications in the second start winning a prize memory display area 5HR and the hold number of the second special figure game decreases due to the establishment of the new second start condition, the second decrease Erase the second hold display (the second hold display that has been displayed from the oldest) displayed on the leftmost side of the second start winning prize memory display area 5HR corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special figure hold information, Each of the other second hold displays is moved (shifted) to the erased second hold display side (left side). In addition, when the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL and the second starting prize winning memory display area 5HR are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as "starting prize memory display area 5H".

In addition, in the display area of the image display device 5, as a hold display area, in addition to the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL and the second starting winning prize memory display area 5HR, the first starting prize winning memory display area 5HL and the second starting prize winning memory display area 5HL. The hold display erased (moved) from the start winning prize memory display area 5HR (that is, the first special figure hold information that is consumed when the first start condition is satisfied, and the second special diagram hold information that is consumed when the second start condition is satisfied). Active display area AHA for displaying a special image showing information including active display (also called display at the time of digestion, current display, etc.) corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the decorative pattern executed based on the special figure hold information (Also referred to as the display area at the time of exhaustion, the display area at the time of exhaustion, the current hold display area, the current hold display area, the active hold display area, the active hold display area, the active display area, the present display area, the current display area, the display time at the time of display, etc. .) is arranged, for example, between the first starting prize winning memory display area 5HL and the second starting winning prize memory display area 5HR.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the active display area AHA is arranged between the first starting prize winning memory display area 5HL and the second starting winning prize memory display area 5HR. The display area AHA may be arranged at any position in the display area of the image display device 5. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in addition to the active display, the active display frame surrounding the active display, the active display, or the active display of characters or images displayed around the active display frame or around the active display frame. Information and the like corresponding to are displayed by a special image.

In the game area of the game board 2, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball are provided. Further, as the winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the big winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. You may be asked. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as prize balls based on the fact that the game balls that have entered any of the general winning openings have been detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. .. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball as a game medium toward a game area. For example, the hit ball operation handle adjusts the elastic force of the game ball according to the amount of operation (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hit ball operation handle may be provided with a single-shot launch switch for stopping the drive of the launch motor included in the hit ball launching device, and a touch ring (touch sensor).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so that it can be supplied to the ball striking device. An upper plate (striking ball supply plate) is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3, a lower plate is provided for holding (storing) surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper plate so that they can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

A stick controller 31A, which can be held by a player and tilted by a player, is attached to a member forming the lower tray, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower tray body (for example, a central portion of the lower tray). There is. The stick controller 31A includes an operation rod held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation rod (for example, a position where the index finger of the operating hand is applied when the player holds the operation rod). There is. The trigger button can perform a predetermined instruction operation by pushing and pulling with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 31A with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). It may be configured as follows. A trigger sensor for detecting a predetermined instruction operation such as a push/pull operation with respect to the trigger button may be built in the operation rod.

A tilting direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate below the stick controller 31A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the side of the player who faces the pachinko gaming machine 1. Pair) and four transmission type photosensors (vertical sensor pair) that are arranged perpendicularly to the board surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operating rod when viewed from the player side. It may be configured to include a photo sensor.

As a member forming the upper plate, for example, a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 31A) or the like. It is provided. The push button 31B may be configured to be capable of mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detecting a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation by the player. A push sensor may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the position where the push button 31B is installed, or the like, for detecting a player's operation performed on the push button 31B.

A sound output member is provided in the periphery of the game area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the speaker 8UL and the speaker 8UR are installed at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and the speaker 8LL and the speaker 8LR are installed at the left and right slanted lower parts of the upper plate (the left and right slanted upper parts of the lower plate). It is installed. Hereinafter, the speakers 8UL, 8UR, 8LL, and 8LR will be simply referred to as the speakers 8 unless otherwise distinguished. The speaker 8 outputs (reproduces) voice (sound and voice). For example, the speaker 8 outputs an effect sound (also called a sound effect) according to the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1, and outputs a warning sound according to the situation of the gaming machine 1.

The effect sound includes music, detection sound, response sound, notification sound, and the like. The music in the effect sound is, for example, BGM, a song, or the like that is output according to the progress of the game. The detected sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound, a voice (serif, message) or the like that is output according to the detection result by the switch or the sensor (for example, the detection of the winning of the first starting winning opening or the like). The response sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound, a voice, or the like that is output according to an operation action on the push button 31B. Since the operation action on the push button 31B is also detected by the push sensor, the response sound output according to the operation action on the push button 31B is also a detection sound. The notification sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound or a voice that is notified to request an operation action on the push button 31B, or a sound or a voice that notifies that a reach state is set when a reach state (described later) is made. , A sound, a voice or the like that gives a notice or suggests that the jackpot gaming state will be entered before the jackpot gaming state is entered.

Examples of the warning sound are a warning sound output when the game ball is excessively held (stored) in the lower plate, a warning sound output when the glass door (not shown) is open, and the like. ..

A light emitting member (light emitting body) that emits light as an effect or a decoration is provided inside and around the game area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the light emitting member 9CC is installed in the upper position of the image display device 5, the light emitting members 9CL and 9CR are installed in the left and right positions of the image display device 5, and the light emitting member is installed in the upper position of the gaming machine frame 3. 9U, the light emitting member 9SL, the light emitting member 9SR is installed at the left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. Hereinafter, the light emitting members 9CC, 9CL, 9CR, 9U, 9SL, and 9SR will be collectively referred to as the lamp 9 unless otherwise distinguished. The lamp 9 may be composed of, for example, one or more LEDs, or may be composed of a flash lamp. The light emitting member 9U may be a rotating lamp (for example, a patrol lamp) having a rotating portion. In addition to the above, various light emitting members may be installed around each structure (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 or the like) in the game area.

The image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the like are effect devices that perform effects, but the gaming machine 1 may include other effect devices such as effect models having a drive unit as effect devices.

The arrangement position (installation position) of each component is an example, and may be arranged at another position. For example, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display 20 may be provided on the same side (right side portion or left side portion) of the game area. Further, for example, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, and the universal figure hold indicator 25C may be provided on the same side (right side portion or left side portion) of the game area.

Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the universal figure display device 20 starts the universal figure game based on the establishment of the universal figure start condition after the establishment of the universal figure start condition. In the normal figure game, after starting the variable display of the normal symbol (after starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol), when the predetermined time that is the normal symbol change time elapses, the fixed normal symbol that becomes the variable display result of the normal symbol Is stopped (displayed). At this time, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) such as a number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per symbol”. On the other hand, as the fixed ordinary symbol, if a regular symbol other than the regular symbol, such as a number or a symbol other than the number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed, the variable display result of the regular symbol is “ordinary symbol loss”. Become. In response to the fact that the variable display result of the ordinary symbol is "universal symbol", the expansion opening control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normally variable winning ball device 6B is in the tilt position. When a predetermined time elapses, the normal opening control for returning to the vertical position is performed.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure game (first special figure game) by the first special symbol display device 4A is started based on the first start condition being satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied, and the second Based on the second start condition being satisfied after the start condition is satisfied, the special figure game (second special figure game) by the second special symbol display device 4B is started. In the special figure game, after starting the variable display of the special symbol (after starting the fluctuation of the special symbol), when the variable display time as the special symbol change time elapses, the variable display result of the special symbol becomes the fixed special. Derivatively display the design (results of special figure display). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, the result is "big hit" as a specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. If so, the predetermined display result is "small hit". Also, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it becomes "miss".

After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as a specific game state in which a round advantageous to the player (also called "round game") is executed a predetermined number of times. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled as a special game state different from the big hit game state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, as an example, the special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” are the big hit symbols, and the special symbols indicating the numbers “2” are the small hit symbols, The special symbol showing the symbol "-" is a lost symbol. In addition, each symbol such as a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, a lost symbol in the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. It may be a symbol, and a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol.

After the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game and becomes the "big hit" as the specific display result, the big winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 has a predetermined upper limit time in the big hit gaming state. The special winning opening is opened for a period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds) or for a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls. As a result, a round in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is brought into the first state (open state), which is advantageous for the player, is executed.

The special winning a prize opening device, by receiving the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2, and then closing the special winning a prize, the special award winning prize opening device having the special award winning entrance opened during the execution of the round. 7 is changed to a second state (closed state), which is disadvantageous to the player, and one round is ended. The round which is the opening cycle of the special winning opening can be repeatedly executed until the number of times of execution reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, "15"). Even before the number of times the round has been executed reaches the upper limit, the execution of the round may be ended when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has not won in the special winning opening).

Among the rounds in the big hit game state, the round in which the upper limit time for setting the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is a relatively long time (for example, 29 seconds) is normally opened. Also called a round. On the other hand, a round in which the upper limit time for which the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the first state (open state) is a relatively short time (for example, 0.1 seconds) is also called a short-term open round.

Of the special symbols showing the numbers "3", "5", "7" which are big hit symbols, the special symbols showing the numbers "3", "7" are usually open round big hit symbols and the number "5" The special design that indicates is a short-term open round jackpot design. In the special opening game, the special opening winning jackpot of the special variable winning a prize ball device 7 in the jackpot gaming state (normal opening jackpot state) as the normal opening round specific game state that is controlled after the jackpot symbol is released. The door opens the special winning opening in a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) which is a first period elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. As a result, a round in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is executed. The normal open jackpot state is also called the first specific game state.

Short-term open round as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game Short-term open round controlled after the big-hit symbol is derived. In the big-hit gaming state (short-term open big-hit state) as a specific game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 is used in each round. The upper limit time (upper limit of the period in which the special winning opening is opened by the special winning opening door) for changing to the first state, which is advantageous to the player, is shorter than the first period in the normally open big hit state (for example, 0 1 second). It should be noted that in the short-term open big hit state, the opening period of the special winning opening may be controlled to be the second period, and other controls may be performed in the same manner as in the normal open big hit state. Alternatively, in the short-term open jackpot state, the number of times the round is executed may be the second round number (eg, “2”) smaller than the first round number (eg, “15”) in the normal open jackpot state.

In such a short-term open big hit state, if a game ball wins the special winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of payout balls (prize balls) can be obtained. However, the opening period of the special winning opening is the second period (0.1 seconds or the like), which is very short. Therefore, the short-term open big hit state is a big hit game state in which a payout (prize ball) is practically not obtained. The short-term open jackpot state is also called the second specific game state.

In addition, the big hit game state as a short-term open round specific game state is not limited to one in which the period of opening the special winning opening is shorter than that of the big hit game state as the normal opening round specific playing state. For example, opening of the special winning opening. The period (upper limit time) is the same in the short-term open round specific game state and the normal open-round specific game state, but in the short-term open round specific game state, the upper limit number of times (for example, 2 times) that the special winning opening is in the open state is It may be smaller than the upper limit number of times (for example, 15 times) in the normal opening round specific game state. That is, in the big hit game state as the short-term open round specific game state, the period during which the big winning opening is changed to the first state where the game ball easily passes (enters) in each round is longer than the first period in the normal open round specific game state. The second period is also short, and the number of rounds executed is at least one of the second round number smaller than the first round number in the normal open round specific gaming state. ..

In this way, the big hit game state is an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. Advantageous advantages for the player may include other advantageous states such as a probability variation state (high probability state), a time saving state, and a high base state, in addition to the above-described big hit game state.

After the special symbol indicating the number "2" which is the small hit symbol is derived as the fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, it is controlled to the small hit game state as the special game state. In this small hitting game state, as in the short-term open big hitting state, in the special variable winning a prize ball device 7, the variable winning operation for changing the special winning opening to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is performed. That is, in the small hitting game state, for example, the operation of setting the special variable winning ball device 7 in the first state (open state) is repeatedly executed for the second period.

In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R arranged in the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In response to the start of any special drawing game among the games, the variable display of the decorative design is started. In the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variable display state of the decorative pattern is changed to a specific variable during the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the end of the variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern. There may be a predetermined reach state that forms part of the display combination.

The reach state refers to a decorative pattern (also referred to as a “reach variation pattern”) that is not yet stopped and displayed when the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the big hit combination. Is a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or some of the decorative patterns are synchronized and vary while forming all or part of the jackpot combination. In addition, in the following description, reaching the reach state is also referred to as reaching the reach (establishing the reach).

In addition, in response to the reach state, the changing speed of the decorative design is reduced, or a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative design is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. By changing the display mode of the background image, playing back and displaying a moving image different from the decorative pattern, or changing the variation mode of the decorative pattern, a performance effect different from that before the reach state is executed. May be done. The production operation such as the display of the character image and the display mode of the background image, the reproduction display of the moving image, and the change of the variation mode of the decorative pattern are referred to as reach production (or reach production display). In addition, in the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 5, but also the sound output operation by the speaker 8 and the light emitting operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, extinguishing operation) of the lamp 9 and the like before the reach state is set. The operation mode may be different from the operation mode of.

As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of kinds of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, depending on the effect pattern, the possibility that the big hit combination or the like will be finally stopped and displayed after the reach effect (also referred to as "big hit expectation" or "big hit reliability") may be different. Thereby, the jackpot expectation can be made different depending on which of the plurality of types of reach effects is executed, that is, which reach effect is to appear. As an example, in the present embodiment, a reach mode of normal reach and a reach mode of super reach, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach, are set (prepared) in advance.

The jackpot expectation degree is, for example, (probability that the effect is executed during the jackpot)×(probability that the jackpot will occur)/{(probability that the effect will be executed during the jackpot)×(probability that the jackpot will occur)+(except during the jackpot) Is calculated (probability that the effect is executed)×(probability that big hit does not occur)} (when the expectation of big hit is “1”, the variable display result is always “big hit”).

Further, during the variable display of the decorative pattern, as one mode of the variable display effect, a sliding effect, a pseudo continuous effect, etc., which are realized by a variable display operation of the decorative pattern can be executed. In the sliding effect, after changing the decorative design in all of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, in a plurality of decorative design display areas (for example, "left" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5R, etc.) After the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed, a predetermined number (for example, "1" or "2") of decorative design display areas (for example, "left" decorative design display area 5L) are displayed in the temporarily stopped display of the decorative design. In the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R (either one or both), the decorative pattern is changed again, and then stopped and displayed, thereby effecting display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed. In this way, in the sliding effect, a plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed after the variable display of the decorative symbols is started until the fixed decorative symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, and then the predetermined number of decorative symbols are changed. By executing the display again, there are times when the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes the reach state and when the decorative pattern that does not reach the reach state and constitutes the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed.

In the pseudo continuous production, in response to one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special drawing game being satisfied once, the fixed display that is the variable display result after the variable display of the decorative design is started By the time the symbols are derived and displayed, all the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R (for example, a predetermined pseudo continuous chance or the like is a part of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R or (Displayed in all) is temporarily stopped and then, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the re-variable display, which is an effect display for starting the variable display of all the decorative symbols again, is repeated a predetermined number of times ( (For example, up to 4 times).

In the present embodiment, the number of times of re-variable display (re-variable display number) in the pseudo continuous production is variable display (first variable) until all the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped. Number of times of display) (1 time), number of times of re-variable display (final variable display) after the temporary stop of all decorative patterns (1 time), and re-variable between initial variable display and final variable display The number of times X of display (X is 0 or 1 or more) and the number of times (X+2) that is the sum of the number of times of display (X+2) are grasped as one time (X+1). In addition, the number of times of re-variable display is the same as the number of times (temporary stop number) in which all the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The first variable display to the first temporary stop display are also referred to as the first pseudo continuous, the second variable display (the first re-variable display) to the second temporary stop display are also referred to as the second pseudo continuous, and the third pseudo display. Variable display (second re-variable display) to the third temporary stop display is also referred to as the third pseudo-link, and the fourth variable display (third re-variable display) to the fourth temporary stop display is the fourth time. Also referred to as the pseudo-regular. In addition, the number of pseudo consecutives in the pseudo consecutive production is also referred to as a pseudo consecutive variation number (or a pseudo consecutive number). In other words, the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations, the number of re-variable displays, and the number of temporary stops are the same. The increase in the number of pseudo runs such as the first time, the second time, the third time,... Is also referred to as “the pseudo run continues”.

In the variable display effect of "pseudo-run", the variable design is changed based on that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once by performing the re-variable display (re-change) once to four times. The display can be made to appear as if it was started two to five times in a row.

In the pseudo continuous production, before the reach is established in the variation (before the reach state is reached), the pseudo continuous chance eye is temporarily stopped and displayed in any or all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. As described above, the decorative designs in all the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped, and after the reach is established, the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are simulated partially. The decorative symbols in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped so that the consecutive chances are temporarily stopped and displayed. That is, the production mode of the temporary stop display in the pseudo continuous production includes at least the production mode in which the temporary stop display is performed before the reach state and the production mode in which the chance symbol is temporarily displayed after the reach state. May be.

The sliding effect (similarly to the pseudo continuous effect) may be a notification or suggestion to the player that any one of the reach effects may be executed, that a certain reach effect may be executed, or that the jackpot expectation is high. .. Hereinafter, the effects for giving a notice or suggesting to the player that there is a possibility that any one of the reach effects or a certain reach effect may be executed or that the jackpot expectation degree is high may be collectively referred to as an announcement effect. The notice production may use a variable display operation different from the slide production or the pseudo continuous production in addition to the slide production or the pseudo continuous production, for example, a background image display, a message window display, There may be one that uses an effect operation different from the variable display effect, such as hold display, voice output, light emission (lighting, blinking, and extinction).

In the present embodiment, as the notice effect, it is common to change the display mode of the special image representing the information including the active display according to the pending display corresponding to the variation and to not change the display mode of the special image. Includes a common effect executed in. Further, the notice effect includes a success effect in which the display mode of the special image is changed after executing the common effect, and a failure effect in which the display mode of the special image is not changed after executing the common effect. The notice effect may include a suggestion effect that suggests a common effect. Further, similar to the common effect, the suggestive effect may be an effect that is commonly executed when the display mode of the special image is changed and when the display mode of the special image is not changed. In other words, the case where the effect that suggests that the common effect is executed is referred to as a suggestion effect, and the effect that suggests that either the successful effect or the failure effect is executed (common effect or common effect is There is a case in which another effect) is referred to as a suggestion effect.

The notice effect may be executed (started) before the player can determine (actually confirm) whether the notice effect or the content suggested by the notice effect is realized. For example, the notice effect that gives a notice or suggests to the player that the variable display state of the decorative pattern due to the winning of a certain game ball may reach the reach state is at least the variable display state of the decorative pattern due to the winning of the game ball. It may be executed (started) before reaching the reach state (or the non-reach state). In addition, the notice effect that gives a notice or suggests to the player that the variable display result due to the winning of a certain game ball may be a “big hit” is at least the fixed decorative pattern due to the winning of the game ball being stopped and displayed. May be executed (started) before.

The notice performance may include a pre-read notice effect (also referred to as a “preliminary determination notice effect”). The pre-reading notice production determines whether or not the variable display result of the variable display is a "big hit" before starting the variable display subject to the notice based on the special game game hold information and the like. (Pre-reading) is a notice effect executed based on the determination result. In the following description, the hold information that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect is referred to as target hold information, the first hold display corresponding to the target hold information is referred to as the target first hold display, and corresponds to the target hold information. The second hold display is referred to as the target second hold display, and the variable display corresponding to the target hold information is also referred to as the target variable display. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect is executed when the target hold information is consumed (when the target hold information is consumed including variable display of the target) and before the target hold information. There are cases where it is executed during the digestion of the pending information, and cases where it is during the digesting of the target pending information and during the digesting of the pending information prior to the target pending information.

A performance operation which is a pre-reading notice effect by winning a certain game ball is performed by the player after the winning of the game ball (after the start condition is satisfied), and whether or not the content predicted by the pre-reading notice effect is realized. It may be executed (started) before it can be determined. For example, due to the prize winning of a certain game ball, the effect of the pre-reading notice effect for notifying (indicating) to the player beforehand that there is a possibility of reaching the reach state is at least the decorative pattern due to the prize of the game ball. It may be executed (started) before the variable display state becomes the reach state (or the non-reach state). In addition, at least the performance operation of the pre-reading notice performance for notifying (indicating) to the player in advance that the variable display result due to the winning of a certain game ball may be a "big hit" It may be executed (started) before the fixed decorative design by winning is stopped and displayed.

The pre-reading notice effect (preliminary determination notice effect) may be, for example, a hold change effect for changing the display mode of the first hold display in the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL or a first start prize winning memory display area 5HL. An action effect such as an on-hold change gasse effect that does not change the display mode of the first hold display may be prepared. Further, the pre-reading notice effect (preliminary determination notice effect) includes, for example, a hold change effect for changing the display mode of the second hold display in the second start prize winning memory display area 5HR and a second start prize winning memory display area 5HR. An action effect such as an on-hold change gasse effect that does not change the display mode of the second hold display may be prepared.

As a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, when a special symbol that is a lost symbol is stopped (derived), the variable display state of the decorative symbol is not changed to the reach state after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In some cases, a fixed decorative design that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display mode of the decorative pattern is referred to as a “non-reach” (also called “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “miss”.

As a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, when a special symbol that is a lost symbol is stopped (derived), the variable display state of the decorative symbol is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Correspondingly, after the reach effect is executed, the fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined reach-miss combination may be stopped and displayed. The variable display result of such a decorative pattern is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach loss”) when the variable display result is “miss”.

As a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, if the normal jackpot symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped and displayed among the special symbols that are normally open round jackpot symbols, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is Corresponding to the reach state, after a predetermined reach effect is executed, etc., a fixed decoration that becomes a predetermined normal big hit combination (also referred to as "indeterminate variation big hit combination") among a plurality of kinds of big hit combinations The design is stopped and displayed. The predetermined normal jackpot combination is, for example, a normal pattern of the same type (also referred to as "non-probable variation pattern") on a predetermined effective line (for example, a straight line) formed by the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Is a combination in which the final stop is displayed together. An example of a normal design is, among the eight types of decorative designs with design numbers “1” to “8”, four types of decorative designs with even design numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8”. Is.

Corresponding to the fact that the fixed special symbol in the special drawing game becomes the normal big hit symbol, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, the fixed decorative symbol of the normal big hit combination is displayed in a stopped state. , Which is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as "big hit type") of "indeterminate change" (also referred to as "normal big hit") when the variable display result is "big hit". Based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit" in the "non-probable change" big hit type, the normal open big hit state is controlled, and after the end, time shortening control (time saving control) is performed.

By performing the time saving control, the variable display time (special figure variation time) of the special symbol in the special figure game is shortened as compared with the normal state. The normal state is a normal game state different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state, and an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, initialization processing after power-on). The same control as in the state (1) is executed. In the time saving control, one of a condition that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the jackpot gaming state is ended and that the variable display result is “big hit” is established first. Sometimes you just need to quit.

As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, among the special symbols that are normally open round jackpot symbols, when the probability variation jackpot symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is Corresponding to the reach state, after a reach effect similar to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative design is "normal" is executed, etc., a predetermined probability variable big hit combination among a plurality of kinds of big hit combinations There is a case where the fixed decorative pattern that is displayed is stopped. In other words, when the probability variation jackpot design is finally stopped and displayed in the special drawing game, the decoration design which is the predetermined probability variation jackpot combination is finally stopped, and the decoration pattern which is the predetermined normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. There are cases where it will be done. The predetermined probability variation big hit combination is, for example, a combination in which the same type of probability variation symbols are lined up on the activated line and finally stopped and displayed. An example of the probability variation pattern is, among the eight types of decorative symbols having the symbol numbers “1” to “8”, the four types of decorative symbols having the odd number “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”. Is.

Regardless of whether the fixed decorative design is a normal big hit combination or a probability variation big hit combination, the variable display mode in which the probability variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the special drawing game is a "big hit" variable display result. In this case, it is referred to as a variable display mode of "probability change" (also referred to as "big hit type"). Based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit" in the "probable change" big hit type, the normal open big hit state is controlled, and after that, probability variation control (probability change control) is performed together with time saving control. By performing the probability variation control, the probability that the variable display result (special figure display result) is a "big hit" in each special figure game is improved to be higher than in the normal state. The probability variation control may be finished when the condition that the variable display result becomes "big hit" and the big hit game state is controlled again after the big hit game state ends. Like the time saving control, the probability variation control may be ended when the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the end of the big hit game state. In addition, the probability variation control may be terminated when it is determined that there is a probability variation fall, which ends the probability variation control in the probability variation fall lottery executed each time the special figure game is started after the end of the big hit game state. ..

When the time saving control is performed, the control for making the variation time of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary symbol game by the ordinary symbol display 20 (general symbol variation time) shorter than in the normal state, or the variation of the ordinary symbol in each regular symbol game Control for improving the probability that the display result is "Public hit" compared to that in the normal state, tilt control of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 6B based on that the variable display result is "Public hit" In order to make it easier for the game ball to pass (enter) through the second start winning port, such as control for making the tilt control time for performing longer than in the normal state and control for increasing the number of tilts than in the normal state By increasing the possibility that the starting condition will be satisfied, control that is advantageous to the player is performed. In this way, the control that makes it easier for the player to enter the game ball into the second start winning port along with the time saving control is also referred to as high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed.

By performing the high opening control, the frequency of the second starting winning opening being in the expanded opening state is increased as compared with the case where the high opening control is not performed. Therefore, the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is likely to be established, and the second special figure game can be executed frequently. The time until it becomes a "big hit" is shortened. The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time saving control is performed.

The gaming state in which both the time saving control and the high opening control are performed is also called a time saving state or a high base state. The gaming state in which the probability variation control is performed is also referred to as a probability variation state or a highly accurate state. The gaming state in which the time saving control and the high opening control are performed together with the probability variation control is also referred to as a highly accurate high base state. The probability variation state in which only the probability variation control is performed and neither the time saving control nor the high opening control is performed is also referred to as a highly accurate low base state. It should be noted that only the gaming state in which the time saving control and the high opening control are performed together with the probability variation control may be referred to as a “probability variation state” in particular, and may be referred to as a time saving probability variation state in order to distinguish it from the highly accurate low base state. On the other hand, the certainty variation state in which only the certainty variation control is performed and neither the time saving control nor the high opening control is performed (highly accurate low base state) is sometimes referred to as the no time saving certainty variation state in order to distinguish it from the highly accurate high base state. The time saving state in which the time saving control or the high opening control is performed without performing the probability variation control is also referred to as a low accuracy high base state. The normal state in which neither the probability variation control, the time reduction control, nor the high opening control is performed is also referred to as a low accuracy low base state. When at least one of the time saving control and the probability variation control is performed in the game state other than the normal state, the special figure game (second special figure game) can be frequently executed, and each special figure game (first special figure game) is executed. By increasing the probability that the variable display result in the (drawing game, the second special drawing game) will be a "big hit", it becomes an advantageous state for the player. A game state that is advantageous to the player and different from the jackpot game state is also called a special game state.

As a fixed special symbol in the special figure game, when a short-term open round big hit symbol such as a special symbol indicating the number "5" is stopped and displayed, or a small hit symbol such as a special symbol indicating the number "2" is stopped and displayed. In this case, the variable display state of the decorative design may not reach the reach state, and any one of a combination of a plurality of types of fixed decorative designs predetermined as the opening opportunity may be stopped and displayed. Also, as a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, when the short-term open round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, a predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol being in the reach state. After a certain time, etc., the fixed decorative pattern which is a predetermined reach combination may be stopped and displayed.

In response to the fixed special symbol in the special drawing game becoming a short-term open round big hit symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which various fixed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed is when the variable display result is "big hit". It is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a "big hit type") of "attack probability" (also referred to as "sudden big hit" or "sudden probability big hit"). Based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit" in the "hit" big hit type, the short-term open big hit state is controlled, and after the end, the time variation control and the probability variation control may be performed.

As a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the small hit symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number "2" is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is "small hit", and the small hit game state is controlled. After the end, the game state is not changed, and the variable display result is continuously controlled to the state before the small hit. However, if the special figure game in which the variable display result is "small hit" is executed and the number of executions of the special figure game in the special game state has reached a predetermined number, after the small hit game state ends, The special game state may end and the normal state may occur.

The re-lottery effect may be executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern in which the fixed decorative pattern is the non-probable-variable big-hit combination or the probable-variable big-hit combination. For example, as a re-lottery effect, in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, after the decorative designs that are normally a big hit combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, the same decorative designs are changed again to be changed to a probability variation big hit combination. Any of the decorative pattern (probably variable pattern) and the decorative pattern (normal pattern) that is usually a combination of big hits may be finally stopped and displayed as the fixed decorative pattern.

After the fixed decorative pattern which is usually a big jackpot combination is derived and displayed, the next round starts after one of the rounds ends in the jackpot gaming state at the start of the jackpot gaming state or during the execution of a round in the jackpot gaming state. During the period until the end of the last round in the big hit game state until the next variable display game starts, etc. The effect may be executed. The notification effect similar to the promotion effect during the big hit may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the big hit game state. The jackpot mid-promotion production that is executed after the final round in the jackpot game state is sometimes called "ending promotion production".

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13 and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 or the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is mainly intended for a setting function of random numbers used in a special drawing game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and a sub-side control board including an effect control board 12 and the like. It has a function of outputting a control command as an example of the command information as a control signal and transmitting it, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like. In addition, the main board 11 controls the lighting/extinguishing of each LED (for example, a segment LED) that constitutes the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Variable display of the predetermined identification information, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting/lighting/coloring of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

On the main board 11, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that captures detection signals from various switches for detecting a game ball and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, from the game control microcomputer 100. The solenoid circuit 111 and the like for transmitting the solenoid drive signal of No. 1 to the solenoids 81 and 82 are mounted.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and outputs the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the lamp. Various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electric parts such as 9 are mounted. That is, the production control board 12 is an electric component for production such as a display operation in the image display device 5, a whole or a part of a sound output operation from the speaker 8, and a whole or a part of a lighting/extinguishing operation of the lamp 9 or the like. Is provided with a function for determining the control content for executing a predetermined effect operation.

The voice control board 13 is a control board for voice output control that is provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs audio from the speaker 8 based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control, which is provided separately from the effect control board 12, and turns on/off the lamp 9 or the like based on a command or control data from the effect control board 12. It is equipped with a lamp driver circuit and so on.

As shown in FIG. 2, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 is connected to the main substrate 11. The gate switch 21, the first starting opening switch 22A, the second starting opening switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have arbitrary configurations such as those called a sensor that can detect a game ball as a game medium. If In addition to the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, and the count switch 23, the gaming machine 1 similarly has other switches (for example, a glass door (not shown) connected to the main board 11). ), a switch for detecting the open/closed state, a switch for detecting the open/closed state of the game board 2 itself, a switch for detecting unauthorized vibration, a switch for detecting unauthorized electromagnetic waves). Further, on the main substrate 11, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the ordinary symbol display device 20, the first holding display device 25A, the second holding display device 25B, the public figure holding display device 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

FIG. 3A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of EXT data is "0". Note that the command form shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals composing the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 3(A), the command 8001H is a first fluctuation start command that specifies fluctuation start in the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command that designates variation start in the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a variation pattern designating command that designates a variation pattern of the decorative design or the like that is variably displayed in each decorative design display area 5L, 5C, 5R corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special drawing game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the designated variation pattern and the like.

The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result notification command, as shown in FIG. 3(B), for example, different EXT data depending on the determination result of whether the variable display result is “miss” or “big hit” or the big hit type. Is set.

The command 8F00H is a symbol determination command for designating the final stop symbol in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set, for example, according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates display of an effect image showing the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the special winning opening to notify that it is a period during which the special winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the pre-determined result or the big hit type determination result. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. In the special winning opening opening notification command and the big winning opening opening notification command, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of times the round has been executed (for example, "1" to "15") in the normal opening jackpot state or the short-term opening jackpot state. Is set.

The command B100H is the first special prize based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the first starting winning occurs. It is a first start opening winning a prize designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the first special figure game by the symbol display device 4A is satisfied.

The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the second starting winning is generated. It is the second start winning combination designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the second special drawing game by the special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command for notifying the first reserved figure reserved memory number in order to display the first reserved figure reserved memory number such that it can be specified in the first starting prize winning memory display area 5HL or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved memory number in order to display the special figure reserved memory number in the second starting prize winning memory display area 5HR or the like so as to be specified.

In the present embodiment, as the reserved storage information, a first starting mouth winning designation command and a second starting mouth winning designation command that specify whether the first starting winning opening has been won or the second starting winning opening has been won. Along with the transmission, a first reserved storage number notification command and a second reserved storage number notification command that specify the first special figure reserved storage number and the second special figure reserved storage number are also transmitted. It should be noted that when the number of reserved storages increases, the number of reserved storages addition designation command (first reserved storage count addition designation command or second designation (Reserved storage number addition designation command) is transmitted while the number of reserved storages decreases, the reserved storage number subtraction designation command (first 1 reserved storage number subtraction designation command or second reserved storage number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

A total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted instead of the first reserved storage number notification command or the second reserved storage number notification command. Further, a total pending storage number addition designation command (total pending storage number subtraction designation command) for notifying the increase (or decrease) of the total pending storage number may be transmitted.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning time determination result designating command) showing the contents of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a symbol designating command showing the determination result of whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit” is there. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating the determination result of the variation category (also referred to as “variation pattern type”) as the winning determination result. The variation category is a name when the variation patterns of decorative patterns are classified (aggregated) by type. In other words, the variation category is a group name of each group including variation patterns of one or more decorative designs that are categorized into a common group.

In the present embodiment, in the winning random number determination process (see FIG. 15A), when the start winning occurs, the variable display result is determined to be "big hit" based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. Whether or not it is determined to be a "small hit", if it is determined to be a "big hit", the type of the big hit is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the variation category The variation category (variation pattern type) is determined based on the random number value MR3 for determination. Then, a value corresponding to the determination result is set in the EXT data of the symbol designating command and the variation category command, and control is performed to transmit to the effect control board 12. Based on the value set in the symbol designation command, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines whether or not the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” or “small hit” and the big hit type. In addition to being recognizable, the variation category can be recognized based on the value set in the variation category command.

The effect control commands such as the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are used when the effect control CPU 120 controls one or more effect devices (the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, etc.). Hereinafter, the effect control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5 is a display control command, the effect control command used to control the audio output from the speaker 8 is a voice control command, and the light emission operation of the lamp 9 ( The effect control command used to control the lighting operation, blinking operation, and extinguishing operation) is also referred to as a lamp control command. It should be noted that some of the effect control commands may be a display control command, a voice control command, and a lamp control command.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and has a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a program for game control to perform a control operation, and numerical data that indicates a random number value independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 for performing and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 are provided.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 to execute a process for controlling the progress of a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101 for fixed data, the CPU 103 writes variable data in the RAM 102 for temporary storage, and the variable data write operation for storing temporary data in the RAM 102. Fluctuating data read operation of reading data, reception operation in which the CPU 103 receives various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105, and CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside is also performed.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random number values counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 4, in the present embodiment, on the side of the main substrate 11, a random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, a random number value MR3 for determining the variation category, and a universal figure. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the display result and the random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern are controlled to be countable. A random number value other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. The random number used to control the progress of such a game is also called a game random number.

The random number circuit 104 may be any one that counts numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR5. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted.

Next, the variation pattern of the decorative design will be described. Hereinafter, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" is referred to as "loss variation pattern". The loss variation pattern corresponds to the "non-reach variation pattern ("non-reach variation pattern" "non-reach" when the variable display result of the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach". (Also referred to as "(miss) variation pattern")" or "variable display result is "miss", and the "reach variation pattern" ("reach loss variation pattern") corresponding to the variable display mode of the decorative pattern being "reach" Also referred to as “”.

Further, a variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit" is referred to as a "hit variation pattern". The hit variation pattern includes a “big hit variation pattern” corresponding to the variable display result being “big hit” and a “small hit variation pattern” corresponding to the variable display result being “small hit”. As the jackpot variation pattern, a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to each jackpot type may be prepared.

In the non-reach variation pattern, a plurality of variation patterns with different variation times are prepared corresponding to the time saving control executed when the total number of pending memories is large, or when the game state is the probability variation state or the time reduction state. Good. As a result, any one of the variation patterns is selected according to the total number of pending storages and the gaming state, so that it is possible to control the variation time according to the total number of pending storages and the gaming state.

For the variation patterns including the reach effect such as the jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern, the variation patterns corresponding to the reach modes of the respective reach effects are prepared. A variation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed is referred to as a “normal reach variation pattern”, and a variation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach is performed is referred to as a “super reach variation pattern”.

FIG. 5 shows a specific example of the fluctuation category and the fluctuation pattern in this embodiment. In FIG. 5, the variation category “PA1” is a shortened/non-reach (miss) variation category. The variation pattern “PA1-1” belongs to the variation category “PA1”. The variation category “PA2” is a non-reach (miss) variation category. The fluctuation patterns “PA2-1” to “PA2-3” belong to the fluctuation category “PA2”. The variation category “PA3” is a normal reach (miss) variation category. The fluctuation patterns “PA3-1” and “PA3-2” belong to the fluctuation category “PA3”. The variation category “PA4” is a super reach α (miss) variation category. Variation patterns “PA4-1” to “PA4-4” belong to the variation category “PA4”. The variation category “PA5” is a super reach β (miss) variation category. The fluctuation patterns “PA5-1” to “PA5-4” belong to the fluctuation category “PA5”. The variation category “PB3” is a normal reach (big hit) variation category. The fluctuation patterns “PB3-1” and “PB3-2” belong to the fluctuation category “PB3”. The variation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) variation category. The fluctuation patterns “PB4-1” to “PB4-4” belong to the fluctuation category “PB4”. The variation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) variation category. The fluctuation patterns “PB5-1” to “PB5-4” belong to the fluctuation category “PB5”.

The variation pattern “PA2-1” belonging to the variation category “PA2” is a non-reach (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length as non-reach (loss). The variation pattern “PA2-2” is a non-reach (miss) variation pattern in which the sliding effect is executed. The special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-2” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1” because the sliding effect is executed. The same applies to other variation patterns in which the sliding effect is executed. The variation pattern “PA2-3” is a non-reach (miss) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. The special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-3” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1” because the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed. The same applies to other variation patterns in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed. The variation pattern “PA1-1” belonging to the variation category “PA1” is a non-reach (miss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is shorter than the variation pattern “PA2-1”.

The variation pattern “PA3-1” belonging to the variation category “PA3” is a normal reach (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is normally long as normal reach (loss). Further, the variation pattern “PA3-2” is a normal reach (miss) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PA4-1” belonging to the variation category “PA4” is a super reach α (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is normally long as the super reach α (loss). The variation pattern “PA4-2” is a super reach α (miss) variation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed as a fake. The special figure change time of the change pattern "PA4-2" is longer than the special figure change time of the change pattern "PA4-1" because the pseudo-continuous change (effect) is executed as a guise. The same applies to other variation patterns in which pseudo-repeated variation (effect) is executed as a fake. The variation pattern “PA4-3” is a super reach α (loss) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. Further, the variation pattern “PA4-4” is a super reach α (loss) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed twice.

The variation pattern “PA5-1” belonging to the variation category “PA5” is a super-reach β (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is normally long as super-reach β (loss). The variation pattern “PA5-2” is a super reach β (loss) variation pattern in which pseudo-repeated variation (effect) is executed as a fake. The variation pattern “PA5-3” is a super reach β (loss) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. Further, the variation pattern “PA5-4” is a super reach β (loss) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed twice.

The fluctuation pattern "PB3-1" belonging to the fluctuation category "PB3" is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as a normal reach (big hit). In addition, the variation pattern “PB3-2” is a normal reach (big hit) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PB4-1” belonging to the variation category “PB4” is a super-reach α (big hit) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is normally long as super-reach α (big hit). The fluctuation pattern “PB4-2” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-repeated fluctuations (effects) are executed as a guise. The variation pattern “PB4-3” is a super reach α (big hit) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. Further, the variation pattern “PB4-4” is a super reach α (big hit) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed twice.

The fluctuation pattern "PB5-1" belonging to the fluctuation category "PB5" is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is normally long as super reach β (big hit). The fluctuation pattern “PB5-2” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-repeated fluctuations (effects) are executed as a guise. The variation pattern “PB5-3” is a super reach β (big hit) variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed once. Further, the variation pattern “PB5-4” is a super reach β (big hit) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed twice.

It should be noted that, in FIG. 5, description of the variation pattern when the big hit type of the small hit variation pattern and the big hit variation pattern is abrupt is omitted, but the loss variation pattern (non-reach variation pattern, Reach loss variation pattern) and the big hit variation pattern (except when the big hit type is abrupt).

In the ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2, various data used for controlling the progress of the game are stored in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, etc. prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, in the ROM 101, data (for example, information specifying the content of the control command) forming a plurality of command tables used by the CPU 103 to transmit control signals which are various control commands from the main board 11, and a diagram. Data and the like forming a table as shown in FIG. 5 are stored.

FIG. 6 shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the present embodiment, as the special figure display result determination table, a first special figure display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 6A and a second special figure display result determination table 130B shown in FIG. It is prepared. In the first special symbol display result determination table 130A, a fixed special symbol which is a variable display result in the first special symbol game (special symbol game using the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A is derived and displayed. Previously, whether to control the variable display result as a "big hit" in the big hit game state, or whether to control the variable display result as a "small hit" in the small hit game state, for determining the special figure display result 3 is a table referred to for making a decision based on the random number value MR1 of FIG. In the second special symbol display result determination table 130B, a fixed special symbol which is a variable display result in the second special symbol game (special symbol game using the second special symbol) by the second special symbol display device 4B is derived and displayed. Previously, whether to control the variable display result as a "big hit" in the big hit game state, or whether to control the variable display result as a "small hit" in the small hit game state, for determining the special figure display result 3 is a table referred to for making a decision based on the random number value MR1 of FIG.

In the first special figure display result determination table 130A, the special figure is displayed according to whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the time saving state (low certainty state), or the certainty changed state (high certainty state). The numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for result determination is assigned to the special figure display results of "big hit", "small hit", and "miss". In the second special figure display result determination table 130B, a disturbance for determining the special figure display result is determined depending on whether the game state is the normal state, the time saving state (low certainty state), or the certainty changed state (high certainty state). The numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the numerical value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

In each of the first special figure display result determination table 130A and the second special figure display result determination table 130B, when the game state is the probability changing state (high accuracy state), it is the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state). More decision values are assigned to the special jackpot display result of "big hit" than when. Thereby, in the probability variation state (high accuracy state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, as compared with the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state), the special figure display result is set as “big hit” and the big hit game. The probability of being determined to control the state increases.

In the setting example of the first special figure display result determination table 130A, the determined value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of "30000" to "30350") is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". On the other hand, in the setting example of the second special figure display result determination table 130B, the determined value is not assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". With such a setting, a "small hit" does not occur in the second special figure game, so that the normal variable winning ball device 6B is formed, for example, in a time saving state (low accurate high base state) or a positive change state (high accurate high base state). It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a “small hit” where it is difficult to obtain a prize ball in a game state where the game ball easily enters the second start winning hole, and to prevent the deterioration of the game interest due to the extension of the game. ..

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table 130B and the first special figure display result determination table 130A, different predetermined range determination values may be assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". For example, in the second special figure display result determination table 130B, a smaller determination value than in the first special figure display result determination table 130A may be assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". As a result, it is possible to avoid frequent occurrence of "small hit" in the gaming state in which the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B. Alternatively, the special figure display result may be determined by referring to a common special figure display result determination table for the first special figure game and the second special figure game.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 determines one of a plurality of jackpot types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "jack". It is a table referred to for. In the jackpot type determination table 131, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A (special symbol game using the first special symbol) is executed, or the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The numerical value (determined value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type depends on whether the (special figure game using the second special figure) is executed. Is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table 131, when the first special figure game is executed, that is, when the special figure to be changed (also referred to as a variable special figure) is the first special figure, the determined value of the predetermined range ( (Values in the range of “82” to “99”) are assigned to the jackpot type “probability”, on the other hand, when the second special figure game is executed, if the variable special figure is the second special figure, No decision value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability". With such a setting, since it is not "probable" in the second special figure game, it is possible to obtain a prize ball in a game state in which the game ball easily enters the second starting prize hole formed by the normally variable prize ball device 6B. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of difficult “probability” and prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the extension of the game.

Note that different predetermined range determination values may be assigned to jackpot types of "probability" depending on whether the variation special map is the first special figure or the second variation special figure. For example, when the variation special map is the second special figure, a smaller determination value than that in the case where the variation special figure is the first special figure may be assigned to the jackpot type “probability”. As a result, it is possible to avoid frequent occurrence of "probability" in the gaming state in which the game ball easily enters the second start winning hole formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B. Alternatively, the big hit type may be determined by referring to common table data when the variation special map is the first special figure and the second special figure.

The ROM 101 also stores a variation category determination table that is referred to when determining the variation category to be one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables that differ from each other in the types of variation categories that can be determined in the variation category determination table, the respective determination rates, and the like. In the variation category determination table, a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation category is assigned to each variation category. That is, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables that have different determination values (for example, the range of the determination value and the number of determination values) assigned to at least one variation category of the plurality of types of variation categories. There is. Instead of the plurality of variation category determination tables, one large variation category determination table including information of all variation category determination tables may be stored in the ROM 101.

Further, the ROM 101 stores a fluctuation pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine the fluctuation pattern to be one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation pattern determination tables that differ from each other in the types of variation patterns that can be determined in the variation pattern determination table, the respective determination rates, and the like. In the fluctuation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR5 for fluctuation pattern determination is assigned to each fluctuation pattern. That is, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation pattern determination tables that have different determination values (for example, the range of the determination value and the number of determination values) assigned to at least one of the plurality of types of variation patterns. There is. Instead of the plurality of fluctuation pattern determination tables, one large fluctuation pattern determination table including the information of each fluctuation pattern determination table may be stored in the ROM 101.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM that is partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot supply power). It In particular, at least the data according to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. Data according to the control state of the game control means, when the power is restored after the occurrence of a power outage, etc., the data necessary to restore the control state before the occurrence of a power outage (for example, a special figure Process flag, etc.). Further, data according to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 8, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling progress of a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. There is. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 8 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, a general figure reservation storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game. The control timer setting unit 153, the game control counter setting unit 154, and the game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 151A is a special figure game in which the game balls have passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and the first starting winning has occurred, but the game has not yet started ( Hold data (first special figure hold information) of the first special figure game) by the first special symbol display device 4A is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates a winning number into the first start winning opening (detection order of game balls) with a holding number, and a random number is generated by the CPU 103 based on passage (entry) of the game balls. Numerical data and the like indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 and the like are stored as reservation data (first special figure reservation information) until the number of storage reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 151B is a special figure game in which the game ball has passed (entered) through the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B and the second starting winning has occurred, but has not yet started. Hold data (second special figure hold information) of (the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B associates the winning number into the second start winning opening (detection order of the game ball) with the reservation number, and the CPU 103 generates a random number based on the passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data or the like indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 or the like is stored as reservation data (second special figure reservation information) until the number of storage reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

In addition, the holding data of the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A (first special figure hold information based on the establishment of the first start condition), and the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B The hold data (the second special figure hold information based on the establishment of the second start winning) may be stored in a common hold storage unit in association with the hold number.

The general figure reservation storage unit 151C stores the reservation data regarding the general figure game which has not yet been started by the ordinary symbol display device 20 (general figure reservation, although the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21). Information). For example, the public figure reservation storage unit 151C is associated with the reservation numbers in the order in which the game balls pass through the passage gate 41, and based on the passage of the game balls, the CPU 103 extracts the general figure display result from the random number circuit 104 or the like. Numerical data or the like indicating the random number MR4 for use as reservation data (universal figure reservation information) is stored until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit value (eg, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state.

The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating a timer value for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count value used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in the game control counter setting unit 154, the first reserved storage number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter for counting the first special diagram reserved storage number, and the second special figure reserved storage number. The second pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter for counting, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number, and the like, Remembered.

The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The I/O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 is an input port for receiving various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmitting the signal.

As shown in FIG. 2, the production control board 12 is provided with a production control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores a production control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area of the production control CPU 120. RAM 122, a display control unit 123 that executes a process for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and a random number that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the effect control CPU 120. A circuit 124 and an I/O 125 are mounted.

As an example, in the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 121, whereby processing for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric components is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads a fixed data from the ROM 121, a fixed data read operation, the effect control CPU 120 writes various variable data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the variable data, and the effect control CPU 120 RAM 122. The variable data reading operation of reading various kinds of variation data temporarily stored in the production control CPU 120 for receiving the various signals input from the outside of the production control board 12 via the I/O 125, and the production control CPU 120. A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the production control board 12 via the I/O 125 is also performed.

The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

To the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting an information signal (video signal) indicating an effect image to the image display device 5 and for transmitting an information signal (effect sound signal) indicating an instruction to the sound control board 13 are transmitted. Wiring, wiring for transmitting an information signal (illumination signal) indicating a command to the lamp control board 14, and the like are connected. Furthermore, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the operation action of the player for the stick controller 31A is detected from the controller sensor unit 35A, and a game for the push button 31B. A wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that an operation action of a person is detected from the push sensor 35B is also connected.

In the effect control board 12, for example, by the random number circuit 124 or the like, numerical data indicating various random number values used for controlling the effect operation are updatable counted. The random number used to control such a production operation is also referred to as a production random number.

In the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, various data used for controlling the progress of the game are stored in addition to the program for effect control. For example, the ROM 121 stores data that forms a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the production control CPU 120 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings.

For example, the ROM 121 stores a hold display mode determination table that is referred to in order to determine the display mode of the first hold display displayed in the first start winning prize storage display area 5HL to any one of a plurality of types. There is. Specifically, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of pending display mode determination tables that differ from each other in the types of display modes that can be determined in the pending display mode determination table, the respective determination rates, and the like. In the hold display mode determination table, a numerical value (decision value) that is compared with a random number value MR6 (not shown) for determining the display mode of the first hold display is assigned to each display mode of the first hold display. .. Instead of the plurality of hold display mode determination tables, one large hold display mode determination table including information of all the hold display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

Further, for example, the ROM 121 stores a hold display mode determination table that is referred to in order to determine the display mode of the second hold display displayed in the second start winning prize storage display area 5HR to any one of a plurality of types. Has been done. Specifically, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of pending display mode determination tables that differ from each other in the types of display modes that can be determined in the pending display mode determination table, the respective determination rates, and the like. In the hold display mode determination table, a numerical value (decision value) that is compared with a random number value MR6 (not shown) for determining the display mode of the second hold display is assigned to each display mode of the second hold display. .. Instead of the plurality of hold display mode determination tables, one large hold display mode determination table including information of all the hold display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

Further, the ROM 121 stores a hold effect execution presence/absence determination table that is referred to in order to determine whether to execute a hold effect (also referred to as an effect effect or a hold change effect). Specifically, in the hold effect execution presence/absence determination table, numerical values (decision values) that are compared with a random number value MR7 (not shown) for determining presence/absence of execution of the hold effect are determined for each of whether or not the hold effect is executed. It is assigned. In the present embodiment, the holding effect refers to a pre-reading notice effect that changes the display mode of the hold display displayed in the first starting prize winning memory display area 5HL into a notice mode, and the second starting winning prize memory display area 5HR. And a pre-reading notice effect that changes the display mode of the held display that has been performed to a notice mode. There are a plurality of types of hold effects, and there is also a hold change effect in which a character or the like acts on the hold display in the display area of the image display device 5 to change the display mode of the hold display. In the hold change effect, there is also a hold change effect where a character or the like acts on the hold display in the display area of the image display device 5 but does not change the display mode of the hold display.

Further, the ROM 121 stores an active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute an active display change effect (success effect) that changes a special image including active display. Specifically, the active display change execution presence/absence determination table is compared with a random value MR7 (not shown) for determining whether or not the active display change effect is executed, whether the active display change effect is executed or not. A numerical value (decision value) is assigned.

In the present embodiment, the active display change effect is an effect (main notice effect) of changing the special image to a notice mode. In other words, the active display, the active display frame surrounding the active display, the information corresponding to the active display (for example, the active display or the characters and images displayed around the active display frame, the active display frame, etc.) are used as the notice mode. It is a production (main announcement production) to be changed. As described above, in the active display change effect, the common effect, the success effect executed when changing the special image after executing the common effect (also referred to as active display change effect), and the common effect are executed. A failure effect (also referred to as an active display change gaze effect) that is executed later when the special image is not changed is included. The success effect is an effect that acts on the special image in the display area of the image display device 5 to change the display mode of the special image. On the other hand, the failure effect is an effect that does not change the display mode of the special image by not affecting the special image in the display area of the image display device 5, or a special effect that affects the special image in the display area of the image display device 5. It is an effect that does not change the display mode.

Further, the active display change effect includes a first system change effect that changes the special image mode to any one of a plurality of modes and a special image mode that changes the second system. And the 2nd system change production which changes in any one of a plurality of modes is included. The first system change effect includes a common effect, a success effect, and a failure effect corresponding to the first system change effect, and the second system change effect corresponds to the second system change effect. , Common effects, success effects, and failure effects exist. In the present embodiment, the first system change effect is an effect that changes the display mode of active display (active display displayed as a special image) in the special image, and the second system change effect is in the special image. The effect is to change the display mode of the active display frame (active display frame displayed as a special image).

Further, the ROM 121 refers to the first system change referred to for determining the execution timing of the first system change effect, which is one of the active display change effects (which timing in the variation, etc.). A performance execution timing determination table is stored. In the first system change effect, the rate at which the successful effect related to the first system change effect is executed varies depending on the execution timing of the first system change effect. Further, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of effect execution timing determination tables for the first system change effect, which are different from each other in the types of execution timings that can be determined in the execution timing determination table of the first system change effect, and the respective determination ratios. It may be. In this execution timing determination table of the first system change effect, a numerical value (decision value) that is compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the first system change effect is assigned to each execution timing. There is. Further, in place of the execution timing determination tables of the plurality of first system change effects, one large execution timing determination table of the first system change effects including the information of the execution timing determination tables of the first system change effects is stored in the ROM 121. May be stored.

Further, the ROM 121 refers to the second system change referred to for determining the execution timing (the timing of execution of the second system change effect) which is one of the active display change effects. A performance execution timing determination table is stored. In the second system change effect, the rate at which the successful effect related to the second system change effect is executed varies depending on the execution timing of the second system change effect. Further, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of performance execution timing determination tables for the second system change effect, which are different from each other in the types of execution timings that can be determined in the execution timing determination table of the second system change effect, the respective determination rates, and the like. May be. In the execution timing determination table of the second system change effect, a numerical value (decision value) that is compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the second system change effect is assigned to each execution timing. There is. Further, in place of the plurality of second system change effect execution timing determination tables, one large second system change effect execution timing determination table including information of all the second system change effect execution timing determination tables is stored in the ROM 121. May be stored.

It should be noted that the ROM 121 includes a plurality of first system changes in which the types of execution timings that can be determined in the execution timing determination table for the first system change effect and the execution timing determination table for the second system change effect, the respective determination rates, and the like are different from each other. The effect execution timing determination table of the effect and the execution timing determination table of the second system change effect may be stored as one large active display change effect execution timing determination table. In the execution timing determination table of the active display change effect, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the first system change effect, and the second system, for each execution timing. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining execution timing of the change effect, or a random value (not shown) for determining execution timing of both the first system change effect and the second system change effect A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with may be assigned. Further, instead of the execution timing determination tables of the plurality of active display change effects, one large active display change effect execution timing determination table including information of the execution timing determination tables of all the active display change effects is stored in the ROM 121. Good.

Further, the ROM 121 stores an active display change effect pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine the effect pattern (effect mode) of the active display change effect to any one of a plurality of types. Specifically, in the effect pattern determination table of the active display change effect stored in the ROM 121, a random number value (not shown) for determining the effect pattern of the active display change effect for each effect pattern of the active display change effect. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with is assigned.

It should be noted that the ROM 121 may store a hold change effect execution timing determination table that is referred to in order to determine the execution timing of the hold change effect (timing of how many times the change is executed). Further, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of hold change effect execution timing determination tables in which types of execution timings that can be determined in the hold change effect execution timing determination table, respective determination rates, and the like are different from each other. In this hold change effect execution timing determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the hold change effect may be assigned to each execution timing. Further, instead of the plurality of hold change effect execution timing determination tables, one large hold change effect execution timing determination table including information of all hold change effect execution timing determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

It should be noted that the ROM 121 stores a main notice effect pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of effect patterns (effect modes) of other main notice effects of the above-mentioned active display change effect. It may be. In this case, specifically, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of main notice effect pattern determination tables in which the types of main notice effect patterns that can be determined in the main notice effect pattern determination table, the respective determination rates, and the like are different from each other. The main notice effect pattern determination table may be assigned a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR9 (not shown) for determining the main notice effect pattern for each of the main notice effect patterns. Instead of the plurality of main notice effect pattern determination tables, one large main notice effect pattern determination table including information of all the main notice effect pattern determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

It should be noted that the ROM 121 may store a hold change effect pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine the effect pattern (effect form) of the hold change effect to one of a plurality of types. In this case, in the ROM 121, in the hold change effect pattern determination table, if each hold change effect pattern is assigned a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the hold change effect pattern. Good.

It should be noted that the ROM 121 may store a hold change gasse effect execution presence/absence determination table that is referred to for determining whether to execute the hold change gasse effect. In this case, in the hold change gasse effect execution presence/absence determination table, a numerical value (not shown) that is compared with a random value (not shown) for determining whether or not the hold change gasse effect is executed is determined whether or not the hold change gasse effect is executed. A decision value) may be assigned.

It should be noted that the ROM 121 may store a hold change gasse effect execution timing determination table that is referred to in order to determine the execution timing of the hold change gasse effect (timing such as how many times the change is executed). In this case, the ROM 121 only needs to store a plurality of hold change gasse effect execution timing determination tables that differ from each other in the types of execution timings that can be determined in the hold change gasse effect execution timing determination table and the respective determination rates. A numerical value (determined value) that is compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the pending change gasse effect may be assigned to each execution timing in the pending change gasse effect execution timing determination table. It should be noted that, instead of the plurality of hold change gasse effect execution timing determination tables, one large hold change gasse effect execution timing determination table including information of all the hold change gasse effect execution timing determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

It should be noted that the ROM 121 may store a hold change gasse effect pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine the effect pattern (effect form) of the hold change gasse effect to one of a plurality of types. In this case, in the ROM 121, in the hold change gasse effect pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) that is compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the hold change gasse effect pattern is stored in each of the hold change gasse effect pattern. It may be assigned.

Further, in the ROM 121, an active display mode determination table (also referred to as a “digest display mode determination table”) that is referred to for determining the display mode of the active display displayed in the active display area AHA to any one of a plurality of types. (Referred to) may be stored. In this case, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of active display display mode determination tables that differ from each other in the types of display modes that can be determined in the active display display mode determination table, the respective determination rates, and the like. In the display mode determination table of active display, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the display mode of active display may be assigned to each display mode of active display. That is, in the ROM 121, a plurality of active display display modes in which the above-described determined values (for example, the range or the number of determined values) assigned to at least one display mode among a plurality of types of active display are different from each other A decision table may be stored. Instead of the display mode determination tables of the plurality of active displays, one large active display mode determination table including the information of all active display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

Further, in the ROM 121, a plurality of effect control patterns used by the effect control CPU 120 for controlling effect operations by various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, the effect model, etc.) are configured. Data and the like to be stored. By setting the effect control pattern, various variable display operations such as a decorative pattern, notice effects (including pre-read notice effects), etc. are realized.

The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents of various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the effect control pattern corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns, in the period from the start of the variation of the special symbol in the special figure game until the definite display of the fixed special symbol that is the special symbol display result is displayed. Variable display operation of symbols, reach effect, effect operation in re-lottery effect, etc., or various effect operations without variable display of decorative symbols (for example, hold for display mode of hold display in first start winning prize memory display area 5HL) Effect, and hold effect for the display mode of the hold display in the second start winning prize memory display area 5HR), and the like, and the like, and the like, which are configured to include data indicating the control contents of various effect operations.

FIG. 9A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The production control pattern is composed of control data for controlling various production operations such as production control process timer judgment value, display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and end code. It suffices to set the contents of various kinds of effect control, the switching timing of effect control, and the like in series. In addition, the effect control pattern may include, for example, movable member control data that specifies the content of operation control of a movable member provided inside or outside the game area. The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM built in the effect control CPU 120. Therefore, the determination value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation is set in advance. Instead of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 11, or a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control CPU 120. As described above, data indicating switching timing of effect control may be set corresponding to predetermined control content and processing content.

The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data that specifies the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. The voice control data includes, for example, data indicating a voice output mode from the speaker 8, such as data indicating an output mode of effect sound or the like linked to the variable display operation of the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the voice control data is data that specifies the voice output operation from the speaker 8. The lamp control data includes, for example, data indicating the light emitting operation mode of the lamp 9 (light emitter). That is, the lamp control data is data for designating the light emitting operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, extinguishing operation) of the lamp 9. The operation detection control data includes, for example, data indicating the period during which an operation on the operation unit such as the operation button 30 is effectively detected, the control content of the effect operation when the operation is effectively detected, and the like. That is, the operation detection control data is data that specifies a rendering operation according to an operation on the operation unit. It should be noted that these control data need not be included in all the effect control patterns, but an effect control pattern configured to include some control data according to the content of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be

Drawing 9 (B) is a figure for explaining various production operation performed according to the contents of a production control pattern. The effect control CPU 120 determines the control content of the effect operation according to various control data included in the effect control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative pattern is displayed in a manner specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and the character is displayed. Control is performed to display an effect image such as an image or a background image on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, the control for outputting the sound from the speaker 8 in the mode specified by the voice control data is performed, and the control for causing the lamp 9 to emit light in the mode specified by the lamp control data is performed, and the operation specified by the operation detection control data is performed. During the effective period, the control for accepting the operation on the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B and determining the effect contents is performed. It should be noted that dummy data (data that does not specify control) may be set for the data corresponding to the effect parts that are not controlled even though they correspond to the effect control process timer determination value.

The production operation shown in FIG. 9(B) corresponds to the entire period from the start to the final stop of the variation of the decorative design, but the present invention is not limited to this, and during the variable display of the decorative design. An effect control pattern for executing the effect operation may be provided corresponding to a part of the period (for example, the period for performing the notice effect). Alternatively, in order to execute the production operation corresponding to a predetermined period other than the variable display of the decorative pattern (for example, a period during which a round is being executed in the big hit game state, a period in which an ending effect is executed at the end of the big hit game state, etc.) Effect control pattern may be provided.

When setting the effect control pattern, the pattern data forming the applicable effect control pattern may be read from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the ROM 121 of the pattern data forming the applicable effect control pattern may be read. The storage address in 1 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the read position of the storage data in the ROM 121 may be designated. After that, each time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any one of the production control process timer determination values, and when it matches, the production operation according to various corresponding control data. Control. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 according to the contents of the process data #1 to the process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern, the effect device (the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the like). Control of movable members etc. included in the production model is advanced. In each process data #1 to process data #n, display control data #1 to display control data #n and voice control data #1 to voice control associated with the effect control process timer determination values #1 to #n. Data #n, lamp control data #1 to lamp control data #n, and operation detection control data #1 to operation detection control data #n show the control contents of the effect operation in the effect device and specify the execution of effect control. Control execution data #1 to effect control execution data #n are configured.

A command according to the effect control pattern thus set is output from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. In the display control unit 123 that receives the command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like reads out the image data indicated by the command from an image data memory such as a CGROM and temporarily stores it in the VRAM for expansion. Further, in the voice control board 13 that receives the command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the voice synthesizing IC reads the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like to develop the voice data. ..

In the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 10A, for example, is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 10(A) includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194. There is.

The effect control flag setting unit 191 has a plurality of types in which the state can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the effect image display state on the screen of the image display device 5 or the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores, for each of the plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state.

The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as the operation of displaying an effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating a timer value for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the present embodiment, the data forming the first start-up winning prize reception command buffer 194A as shown in FIG. 10B is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The first start prize-winning reception command buffer 194A is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories (eg, “4”). .. When there is a start winning prize to the first start winning a prize mouth, a starting mouth winning designation command (first starting mouth winning designation command), a symbol designating command, a variable category command, a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command) 4) is set as one set and transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the first start winning prize reception command buffer 194A, of these commands, a storage area is secured so that the symbol designating command, the variation category command, and the first reserved storage number notification command can be stored in association with each other.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the order received at the time of the first start winning a prize from the beginning in the empty area of the first start winning award reception command buffer 194A. At the time of the first start winning, the command transmission is performed in the order of the first starting winning award designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the first reserved storage number notification command. Therefore, if the command reception is normally performed, as shown in FIG. 10B, in the storage area corresponding to each of the buffer numbers “1” to “4”, the starting mouth winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the fluctuation The category command and the first reserved storage number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 10B, the commands are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “3”.

The commands stored in the first start prize-winning reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 10B are deleted one by one each time the variable display of the decorative design is started in synchronization with the first special figure game, Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (winning order of commands). Specifically, when the variable display of the decorative design is started in synchronization with the first special figure game, the variable is stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number of the commands associated with the first starting opening winning award designation command. One deleted command (one set) is deleted, and the command is stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (the command associated with the first start mouth prize designation command). However, it is shifted while maintaining the winning order (the relationship of the buffer numbers).

For example, when the variable display of the decorative design is started in synchronization with the first special drawing game in the storage state shown in FIG. 10B, the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1” is deleted. , The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the buffer number “1”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “3” becomes the buffer number “2”. Be shifted.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the data forming the second start-up winning command buffer 194B as shown in FIG. 10C is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. A storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (eg, “4”) of the total number of reserved memories is provided in the second start winning prize reception command buffer 194B. .. When there is a starting winning prize to the second starting winning a prize mouth, a starting mouth winning designation command (second starting mouth winning designation command), a symbol designating command, a variable category command, a reserved storage number notification command (a second reserved storage number notification command) 4) is set as one set and transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the second start winning award reception command buffer 194B, a storage area is secured so that a symbol designating command, a variation category command, and a reserved storage number notification command among these commands can be stored in association with each other.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands from the beginning in the empty area of the second start winning combination reception command buffer 194B in the order received at the second starting winning combination. At the time of the second start prize, the command transmission is performed in the order of the second start winning combination designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the reserved storage number notification command. Therefore, if the command is normally received, as shown in FIG. 10C, in the storage area corresponding to each of the buffer numbers “1” to “4”, the second start mouth winning designation command, the symbol designation command , The variable category command, and the pending storage number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 10C, the command is stored in the storage area corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “2”.

The commands stored in the second start prize-winning reception command buffer 194B shown in FIG. 10C are deleted one by one each time the variable display of the decorative design is started in synchronization with the second special figure game, Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (winning order of commands). Specifically, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started in synchronization with the second special figure game, it is stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number of the commands associated with the second starting opening winning award designation command. One deleted command (one set) is deleted, and the command is stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (the command associated with the second start mouth winning award designation command). However, it is shifted while maintaining the winning order (the relationship of the buffer numbers).

For example, when the variable display of the decorative design is started in synchronization with the second special drawing game in the storage state shown in FIG. 10C, the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1” is deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the buffer number “1”.

Further, in the present embodiment, data forming the first prefetching notice buffer 194C as shown in FIG. 10D is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The first look-ahead notice buffer 194C is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1" to "4") corresponding to each data forming the first start prize-winning reception command buffer 194A. That is, the first read-ahead notice buffer 194C stores the determination contents regarding the read-ahead notice effect related to each holding information determined by the effect control CPU 120 and the like in association with the buffer numbers "1" to "4". To be done. When the pending data (1 set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the first start-up winning command buffer 194A of FIG. 10B due to the start of variable display of the decorative pattern, etc. In the 1-read-ahead buffer 194C, the contents associated with the buffer number are also deleted. In addition, due to the start of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reserved data (1 set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is received in another buffer number in the first start winning prize reception command buffer 194A of FIG. 10B. When it is shifted to, the contents associated with the buffer number in the first prefetching notice buffer 194C are also shifted to the other buffer number.

In addition, in the present embodiment, data forming the second prefetching notice buffer 194D as shown in FIG. 10E is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The second prefetching notice buffer 194D is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1" to "4") corresponding to each data forming the second start winning award reception command buffer 194B. That is, in the second pre-reading notice buffer 194D, the determination contents regarding the pre-reading notice production regarding the respective holding information decided by the production control CPU 120 and the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers "1" to "4". To be done. When the hold data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the second start winning prize reception command buffer 194B of FIG. 10C due to the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, 2 In the prefetch advance notice buffer 194D, the contents associated with the buffer number are also deleted. Also, due to the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, etc., the reserved data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is received in another buffer number in the second start winning prize reception command buffer 194B of FIG. 10C. When it is shifted to, the contents associated with the buffer number in the second prefetching notice buffer 194D are also shifted to the other buffer number.

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing which is game control main processing. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 makes necessary initialization after setting interrupt prohibition. In this initial setting, the RAM 102 is cleared, for example. Also, the register setting of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. As a result, thereafter, the interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, the interrupt is permitted and then the loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed and then the loop process may be started.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 11. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to cause the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Hereinafter, step S will be simply referred to as S. Then, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information, and the like supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 are output (S13). ).

Following the information output process, a game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as the random number values MR1 to MR5 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (S14). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (S15). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol. Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the display operation of the display device 4B and the opening/closing operation setting of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on and off of the segment LED, etc.) on the ordinary symbol display device 20 by executing the ordinary symbol process process, and the variable display of the ordinary symbol and the movable variable prize ball device 6B are normally variable. Allows setting of tilting motion of winglets.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 103 executes the command control processing to transmit the control command from the main board 11 to the sub-side control boards such as the effect control board 12 (S17). As an example, in the command control process, one of the output ports included in the I/O 105 corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table designated by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, the production control After setting the control data to the output port for transmitting the production control command to the board 12, set the predetermined control data to the output port of the production control INT signal to turn on the production control INT signal for a predetermined time. From the above, it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated after setting the interrupt enable state.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S15 shown in FIG. 11 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (S101). FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in S101 of FIG. 12 as the start winning determination process. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in S208 and S211 of FIG. 13 as the processing for starting winning. FIG. 15A is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in S220 of FIG. 14 as the winning random number determination process.

In the start winning determination process in the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 13, the CPU 103 first detects the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A. Based on the above, it is determined whether or not the first starting opening switch 22A is turned on (S201). At this time, if the first starting opening switch 22A is on (S201; Yes), the first special figure reservation storage number (the first special figure game reservation number) is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, as the upper limit storage number). It is determined whether it is “4”) (S202). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the first special figure reservation storage number by reading the first reservation storage number count value, which is the stored value of the first reservation storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. When the number of 1st special figure reservation storages is not the upper limit in S202 (S202; No), for example, the stored value of the starting mouth buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "1" (S207).

When the first starting opening switch 22A is off in S201 (S201; No), when the first special figure reservation storage number has reached the upper limit value in S202 (S202; Yes), the processing of S209 is executed. After that, based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning port formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B, whether the second starting port switch 22B is ON or not. Is determined (S203). At this time, if the second starting opening switch 22B is turned on (S203; Yes), the second special figure reservation storage number (second special figure game reservation number) is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, as the upper limit storage number). (4)) is determined (S204). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the second special figure reservation storage number by reading the second reservation storage number count value, which is the stored value of the second reservation storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. When the number of second special figure reservation storages is not the upper limit value in S204 (S204; No), for example, the stored value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "2" (S210).

After the process of S207 is executed, the process for starting winning (FIG. 14) is executed (S208), the value stored in the starting mouth buffer is "0 (initialized)" (S209), and the process proceeds to S203. After the processing of S210 is executed, the starting winning a prize processing (FIG. 14) is executed (S211), the stored value of the starting opening buffer is "0 (initialized)" (S212), and the starting winning determination processing is ended. .. Accordingly, even when the first winning opening switch 22A and the second starting opening switch 22B simultaneously detect the starting winning of the game ball, the processing based on the respective detections can be completed.

The CPU 103 updates the number of special figure reservation storages corresponding to the starting mouth buffer value, which is the value stored in the starting mouth buffer, by adding 1 as the starting winning process (S208, S211) (S215 in FIG. 14). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the first holding storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the second holding storage count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. Further, the second reserved storage number count value is updated so as to be incremented by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. Following the processing of S215, the total pending storage number is updated so as to be incremented by 1 (S216). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, may be updated so as to be incremented by 1.

After executing the processing of S216, the CPU 103 selects from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determining Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category are extracted (S217). Numerical data indicating each random number value thus extracted is stored by being set as reservation information at the head of an empty entry in the special figure reservation storage unit 151 corresponding to the starting port buffer value (S218). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are set in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B.

Subsequent to the processing of S218, transmission setting of a starting opening winning a prize designating command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (S219). For example, when the starting mouth buffer value is “1”, the storage address of the first starting mouth winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first starting opening winning award designation command to 12 is performed. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is “2”, the storage address of the second starting opening winning award designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 is controlled. The setting for transmitting the second starting opening winning a prize designation command is performed. The starting mouth winning designation command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control processing of S17 shown in FIG. 11 after the special symbol process processing is completed. To be done.

Subsequent to the processing of S219, a winning random number determination processing is executed (S220). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the reservation storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the reservation storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Settings are performed (S221). The reserved storage number notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control processing of S17 shown in FIG. 11 after the special symbol process processing is completed. To be done.

As the winning random number determination process (S220), the CPU 103 confirms the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by confirming the state of a time saving flag or a probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 or the like. It is specified (S401 in FIG. 15A). The CPU 103 specifies that the probability variation state is the probability variation state when the probability variation flag is on, identifies the time variation state when the probability variation flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are off. Sometimes it is necessary to specify that it is in a normal state.

Following the processing of S401, the starting mouth buffer value (“1” or “2”) or the current game is selected from the table data that constitutes the first special figure display result determination table 130A or the second special figure display result determination table 130B. The special figure display result determination table data used for determining the special figure display result is selected corresponding to the state (S402). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the first special figure display result determination table 130A is set in the usage table. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the second special figure display result determination table 130B is set in the usage table. Then, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in S217 of FIG. 14 is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (S403). In the big hit determination range, the individual decision values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the special figure display result determination table data selected by the process of S402 are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number value MR1 and each decision. It suffices to be able to determine the presence/absence of a decision value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination values included in the big hit determination range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and the minimum or maximum value of the big hit determination range. It suffices to be able to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by making a comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it is determined that the variable display result based on the hold data including the random number value MR1 is determined to be a “jack” (jump start determination). it can.

When it is determined in S403 that it is not within the big hit determination range (S403; No), it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (S404). The CPU 103 executes the same processing as that in the case of the big hit determination range for the determined value assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit” in the special figure display result determination table data selected in the process of S402. It suffices to be able to determine whether or not the random value MR1 is within the small hit determination range. When it is determined in S404 that it is not within the small hitting determination range (S404; No), a symbol designating command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “miss” is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Is set (S405).

When it is determined in S404 that it is within the small hit determination range (S404; Yes), a symbol designating command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “small hit” is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Is set (S407).

When it is determined in S403 that the jackpot is within the jackpot determination range (S403; Yes), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (S409). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the starting opening buffer value”. From the table data forming the jackpot type determination table 131, the jackpot type determination table data is selected. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined. The setting for transmitting the symbol designating command according to the determination result by the process of S409 to the effect control board 12 is performed (S410).

After performing any of the processes of S405, S407, and S410, the variation category is determined (S412). That is, the variation category is determined to be one of the plurality of types shown in FIG. In the process of S412, the CPU 103 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables stored in the ROM 101 (a plurality of types of variation category determination tables in which types of variation categories that can be determined in the variation category determination table, respective determination rates, and the like are different from each other). ), any of the variable category determination tables to be set as the usage table is selected.

Specifically, the CPU 103 causes the special figure display result (for example, the determination result of S403 or S404) and the number of reserved memories (for example, the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154). Any of the variable category determination tables to be set as the usage table is selected based on the first reserved storage number count value). Subsequently, the CPU 103 generates a variation category determination table set as a usage table and numerical data indicating a variation category determination random number MR3 extracted from, for example, the random number circuit 104 or the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154. Based on this, one of the plurality of variation categories is determined.

FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of selection of the variation category determination table. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the variation category determination table. The configuration example of this variation category determination table is four types of variation category tables that are referenced to determine one of a plurality of variation categories. FIG. 17A is a configuration example (denoted as “C-TBL1” in the figure) of a variation category determination table based on a certain variation category determination table among the above four types. FIG. 17B is a configuration example (denoted as “C-TBL2” in the figure) of a variation category determination table according to another variation category determination table. FIG. 17C is a configuration example (denoted as “C-TBL3” in the figure) of a variation category determination table according to still another variation category determination table. FIG. 17C is a configuration example (denoted as “C-TBL4” in the figure) of a variation category determination table according to still another variation category determination table. Note that, for simplification of description, the variation category determination table in which the determination rate is set as shown in FIG. 17A may be simply referred to as the variation category determination table of FIG. 17A. The same applies to FIGS. 17B to 17D and other determination tables such as the variation pattern determination table. FIG. 16 is a selection example of selecting any setting from the four types (setting “C-TBL1” to setting “C-TBL4”) of FIGS. 17A to 17D, that is, the above-described selection example. It is a selection example in which any one of the four variation category determination tables is selected.

The variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 17A (the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 17B, the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. 17C, and FIG. In the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” of (D)), a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation category is assigned to a plurality of types of variation categories.

In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 17A, 0 of the 100 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3 is the variation category. 70 (values in the range of "0" to "69") are assigned to "PA1", and 27 (values in the range of "70" to "96") are assigned to variation category "PA2". “PA3” is assigned, two (values in the range of “97” to “98”) are assigned to the variation category “PA4”, and one (value “99”) is assigned to the variation category “PA5”. There is. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 17A, the variation category “PA1” is 0% (0÷100), the variation category “PA2” is 70% (70÷100), The variation category "PA3" is determined at a rate of 27% (27/100), the variation category "PA4" at 2% (2/100), and the variation category "PA5" at a rate of 1% (1/100).

In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 17B, four out of 100 (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the determination value of the random number value MR3 (“0”). ] To "3") is assigned to the variation category "PA1", 85 (values in the range "4" to "88") are assigned to the variation category "PA2", and eight ("89"). ] To "96") is assigned to the variation category "PA3", two (values in the range "97" to "98") are assigned to the variation category "PA4", and one (value "value" 99") is assigned to the variation category "PA5". That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 17B, the variation category “PA1” is 4% (4÷100), the variation category “PA2” is 85% (85÷100), The variation category “PA3” is determined by 8% (8÷100), the variation category “PA4” is determined by 2% (2÷100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined by 1% (1÷100).

In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. 17C, 64 (“0” of 100 determined values of the random number MR3 (values in the range of “0” to “99”)) ”To “63”) are assigned to the variation category “PA1”, 25 (values in the range “64” to “88”) are assigned to the variation category “PA2”, and eight (“89”). ] To "96") is assigned to the variation category "PA3", two (values in the range "97" to "98") are assigned to the variation category "PA4", and one (value "value" 99") is assigned to the variation category "PA5". That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “CTBL3” in FIG. 17C, the variation category “PA1” is 64% (64÷100), the variation category “PA2” is 25% (25÷100), the variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 8% (8÷100), variation category “PA4” at a rate of 2% (2÷100), and variation category “PA5” at a rate of 1% (1÷100).

In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in FIG. 17D, 20 (“0”) of 100 (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the determination value of the random number value MR3. ”To “19”) are assigned to the variation category “PB3”, 40 (values in the range “20” to “59”) are assigned to the variation category “PB4”, and 40 (“60”). "To a value in the range of "99") is assigned to the variation category "PB5". That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in FIG. 17D, the variation category “PB3” is 20% (20÷100), the variation category “PB4” is 40% (40÷100), The variation category “PB5” is determined at a rate of 40% (40÷100).

In the setting examples of FIGS. 17A to 17C, when the special figure display result is “miss”, when the number of pending storages is large, the shortening/non-reach ( Loss) The determination rate of the variation category (variation category “PA1”) is increased. Specifically, the determination rate “64%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” selected when the special figure display result is “miss” and the number of retained memories is “4”. > The determination rate of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” selected when the special map display result is “miss” and the number of pending storages is “3” or “2” “4%” > The determination rate of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” selected when the special figure display result is “miss” and the number of pending storages is “1” is “0%”.

In addition, in the setting examples of FIGS. 17A to 17C, when the special figure display result is “miss”, the variation category of the super reach (miss) is large or small even if the number of pending storage is small. The variation category “PA4” or the variation category “PA5”) is fixed at a fixed rate. Specifically, in any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”, the determination rate of the variation category “PA5” is “ 1%” and the determination rate of the variation category “PA4” is “2%”.

In addition, in the setting examples of FIGS. 17A to 17C, any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” is used. Even if there is, the determined value of the random number value MR3 that corresponds to the same (common) variation category (the same variation category is determined) exists. That is, if the determined value of the random number value MR3 is a certain value, it is either the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, or the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”. Also, the same variation category is determined. For example, when the determined value of the random number value MR3 is "99", it is one of the variation category determination table "C-TBL1", the variation category determination table "C-TBL2", and the variation category determination table "C-TBL3". Also, the variation category “PA5” is determined. Further, when the determined value of the random number value MR3 is a value in the range of "97" to "98", the variation category "PA4" is determined in any of the above variation category determination tables.

Further, when the determined value of the random number value MR3 is a value in the range of “89” to “96”, the variation category “PA3” is determined in any of the above variation category determination tables. Further, when the determined value of the random number value MR3 is a value in the range of "64" to "69", the variation category "PA2" is determined in any of the above variation category determination tables. As a result, if the determined value of the random number value MR3 is a certain value (a value in each range described above), it is determined that the reach, the super reach, the super reach α, or the super reach β is performed in advance. It can be easily determined. Therefore, it is possible to notify them before the variable display corresponding to the start winning, and the interest in the game can be improved. In the setting examples of FIGS. 17A to 17C, when the determined value of the random number value MR3 is a value in the range of “0” to “69”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, In either of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”, the variation category “PA1” or “PA2” is determined. This makes it possible to easily determine in advance whether or not at least the reach is not reached.

After that, according to the determination result (determination result) of the process of S412, after setting for transmitting any of the variation category commands shown in FIG. 15B to the production control board 12 (S413). The winning random number determination process ends.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101 of FIG. 12, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. To do.

The special symbol normal process of S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0". In this special symbol normal processing, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is "big hit" or "small hit" is decided (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Done. In the special symbol normal processing, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is predetermined. The special symbol normal processing will be described later.

The variation pattern setting process of S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting processing includes processing for determining the fluctuation pattern as any of a plurality of types shown in FIG. 5, a first fluctuation start command (or second fluctuation start command), a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a variable display result notification command. It includes a transmission setting process and the like for transmitting information such as. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variable display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2". The setting of the fluctuation pattern will be described later.

The special symbol variation process of S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, a process for setting for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from when the special symbol starts varying. It includes a process for measuring For example, every time the special symbol variation process of S112 is executed, the special symbol variation timer value that is the stored value in the special symbol variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153 is subtracted from or added to 1, and the first It is the first special figure game by the special symbol display device 4A (special figure game using the first special figure), or the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B (special figure using the second special figure) Whether the game) or not, the elapsed time is measured by a common timer. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In this way, the special symbol variation process of S112 may be a process of controlling the variation of the special symbol in the first special figure game or the second special figure game by a common processing routine. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3".

The special symbol stop process of S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the fixed special symbol which is the variable display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set up for. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is turned on, and when the big hit flag is turned on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". To be done. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the small hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". In addition, when both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

The big hit opening preprocessing of S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". In this big hit opening pre-processing, based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit", etc., there is processing to start the execution of the round in the big hit game state and make settings for opening the big winning opening. include. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the special winning opening is opened may be set in accordance with whether the jackpot type is “non-probable change”, “probable change”, or “probability”. As an example, the big hit type corresponds to "non-probability change" or "probability change", the upper limit of the period for which the special winning opening is opened is set to "29 seconds", and the maximum winning number is the maximum number of times to execute the round By setting the number of times the mouth is opened to "15 times", it is sufficient to set the normal open big hit state. On the other hand, in response to the jackpot type "Sudden", the upper limit of the period for which the special winning opening is opened is set to "0.1 seconds", and the number of opening of the special winning opening, which is the maximum number of times to execute the round, is set. By setting “15 times” to, it is sufficient to set the short-term open big hit state. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5".

The big hit opening process in S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, and the big winning opening based on the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the open state from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the special winning opening is returned to the closed state, after the process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6". ..

The post-big hit opening process of S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This big hit opening post processing determines whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the special winning opening is opened has reached the maximum winning opening maximum number, and the maximum winning opening maximum has been reached. In this case, a process for making settings for transmitting a big hit end designation command is included. When the number of executions of the round does not reach the maximum winning opening maximum number, the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the maximum winning opening maximum reaches the maximum, The value of the process flag is updated to "7".

The big hit ending process of S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". In this big hit ending process, a waiting time corresponding to a period during which an ending effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state by the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8 and the lamp 9 is passed. It includes a process of waiting until and a process of performing various settings for starting the probability variation control and the time saving control in response to the end of the big hit game state. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

The small hit opening pre-processing of S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the big winning opening in the small hit game state based on that the variable display result is "small hit". As an example, when the variable display result is "small hit", the upper limit of the period for which the special winning opening is opened is set as in the case where the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability". It is only necessary to set "0.1 seconds" and set the number of times of opening the special winning opening to "15 times" to set the small hitting game state. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9".

The small hitting open process in S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small hit opening process is the process of measuring the elapsed time after opening the big winning opening and the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time etc. A process for determining whether or not it is included is included. When returning the special winning opening to the closed state, a process of stopping the supply of the drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door may be executed. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10".

The small hit completion process of S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". In this small hitting end process, the production device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8 and the lamp 9 waits until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hitting game state is executed. It includes processing to do. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the state of the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are not changed, and the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 12 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 18, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol reservation storage number is “0” (S231). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second special figure game is held. For example, in the processing of S231, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read and it may be determined whether or not the read value is "0".

When the number of the second special figure reservation storage is other than "0" in S231 (S231; No), the special data is stored as the reservation data stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B corresponding to the reservation number "1". The random number value MR1 for determining the figure display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type are read out (S232). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored by being stored in, for example, a fluctuation random number buffer.

Subsequent to the processing of S232, the second special figure reserved storage number is updated by subtracting 1 from the second reserved storage number count value, and the second special figure reserved storage number is decremented by 1, and the second special figure reserved storage unit is updated. In 151B, the reservation data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number “1” (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted upward by one entry ( S233). Further, in the process of S233, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be updated so that the total reserved storage number count value stored in the total reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1. At this time, the value of the variable special map designation buffer, which is the value stored in the variable special figure designation buffer, is updated to "2" (S234).

When the second special figure reservation storage number is "0" in S231 (S231; Yes), it is determined whether the first special figure reservation storage number is "0" (S235). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first special figure game is held. For example, in the process of S235, the game control counter setting unit 154 may read the first reserved storage number count value stored in the first reserved storage number counter, and determine whether or not the read value is "0". ..

In this way, the process of S235 is executed when it is determined in S231 that the number of second special figure pending storage is “0”, so that the first special figure game and the second special figure game are executed. 2 is held, the second special figure game is executed with priority over the first special figure game. It should be noted that the second special figure game is not limited to a mode in which the second special figure game is executed with priority over the first special figure game, and the game ball enters (passes) through the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). In addition, the special figure game (first special figure game, second special figure game) may be executed in the order in which the start winnings (first starting prize, second starting prize) are generated. In this case, it suffices to provide a table for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the start winning is generated, and to determine which of the first special figure game and the second special figure game is to be executed from the stored data.

When the number of the first special figure reservation storage is other than "0" in S235 (S235; No), the special data is stored as the reservation data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A corresponding to the reservation number "1". Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the figure display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type are read out (S236). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored by being stored in, for example, a fluctuation random number buffer.

Subsequent to the processing of S236, for example, by subtracting 1 from the first reserved storage number count value and updating it, the first special figure reservation storage number is updated to be decremented by 1, and the first special figure reservation storage unit The reservation data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than the reservation number “1” in 151A (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted upward by one entry ( S237). In the process of S237, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be updated so that the total reserved storage number count value stored in the total reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1. At this time, the fluctuation special map designation buffer value is updated to "1" (S238).

After performing either of the processing of S234 and S238, as a use table for determining whether the special symbol display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol is “big hit” or “miss”, as shown in FIG. Similar to the processing of S402 shown in (A), the special figure display result determination table data is selected (S239). That is, in the process of S402, the first special figure display result determination table 130A or the second special figure display result determination table 130B is set in the use table according to the starting opening buffer value (“1” or “2”). In the process of S239, when the fluctuation special map designation buffer value is "1", the first special figure display result determination table 130A is set in the use table, and when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2". May set the second special figure display result determination table 130B to the use table. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for variation is assigned to the special figure display results of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “miss”. By comparing with the value, it is determined whether the special figure display result is “big hit”, “small hit” or “miss” (S240).

After the special figure display result is determined in S240, it is determined whether the special figure display result is "big hit" (S241). Then, when it is determined that the "big hit" (S241; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the ON state (S242). At this time, the jackpot type determination table 131 is selected and set as a use table for determining the jackpot type to any of a plurality of types (S243). By referring to the jackpot type determination table 131 thus set, the numerical data indicating the jackpot type determining random number value MR2 stored in the random number buffer for variation is changed to "indeterminate change", "probable change", or "avoid". Depending on which of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type matches, one of the plurality of jackpot types is determined (S244).

In accordance with the jackpot type thus determined, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (S245), the determined jackpot type Remember. As an example, if the big hit type is "non-probable change", the big hit type buffer value may be "0", if it is "probable change", it may be "1", and if it is "probable", it may be "2".

When it is determined in S241 that it is not a "big hit" (S241; No), it is determined whether the special figure display result is a "small hit" (S246). Then, when it is determined to be a "small hit" (S246; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to an on state (S247).

If it is determined in S246 that it is not a “small hit” (S246; No), or after performing any of the processes of S245 and S247, whether or not to control to the big hit game state or the small hit game state The determination result, further, corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot gaming state, set the confirmed special symbol (S248).

After setting the confirmed special symbol in S248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" which is a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S249), and the special symbol normal process is ended. If the number of pending memories of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in S235 (S235; Yes), after performing a predetermined demo display setting (S250), the special symbol normal process ends. To do. In this demo display setting, for example, a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined production image on the image display device 5 is controlled from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not it has been transmitted to the board 12. At this time, if it has been transmitted, the demo display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo designation command is performed, and then the demo display setting ends.

In the variation pattern setting process of S111, the CPU 103 selects the variation category random number MR3 and the variation pattern determination disorder from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154. Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR5 is extracted.

As described above, when the determination value of the random number value MR3 corresponding to the same variation category exists in each of the variation category determination tables corresponding to the number of pending storages, the determination corresponding to the same variation category is performed. When the random number value MR3 that matches the value is extracted at the time of winning, the number of reserved memories is significantly different between when the winning random number determination process (S220) is executed and when the variation pattern setting process (S111) is executed. Also, in the variation pattern setting process, the same variation category as in the winning random number determination process is determined. For example, in the specific examples of the variable category determination tables “C-TBL1” to “C-TBL3” described above, if the random number value MR3 extracted at the time of winning is “99”, regardless of the number of reserved memories, the winning prize is won. The fluctuation category “PA5” is determined by both the hourly random number determination processing and the fluctuation pattern setting processing. If the random number value MR3 extracted at the time of winning is, for example, in the range of "97" to "98", the variation category "PA4" is determined by the random number determination processing at the time of winning and the variation pattern setting processing regardless of the number of reserved memories. To be done. In the process of S261, it is preferable to determine the variation category by using the variation category determination random number MR3 stored as the reserved data, but the CPU 103 newly extracts the variation category determination random number MR3. Then, the variation category may be determined using the newly extracted random value MR3 for determining the variation category.

Subsequently, the CPU 103 uses the newly extracted random value MR3 for determining the variation category to determine the variation category, as in S412. That is, as shown in FIG. 16, the variation category determination table to be used is selected from the plurality of variation category determination tables shown in FIG. 17 based on the special figure display result and the number of pending storages, and the selected variation category determination table is selected. And the variation category is determined based on the random number MR3 for determining the variation category. Subsequently, the CPU 103 selects one of the plurality of fluctuation pattern determination tables stored in the ROM 101, which is the fluctuation pattern determination table to be set as the usage table, based on the fluctuation category as the determination result. Subsequently, the CPU 103 selects one of the plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variation pattern determination table set as the usage table and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern described above. decide.

FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating an example of setting the determination ratio of the variation pattern. It is assumed that the ROM 101 stores eight types of fluctuation pattern determination tables corresponding to the fluctuation categories. FIG. 19(A) is an example of setting the determination rate of the variation pattern by the variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA1 (shortening/non-reach loss)” among the above eight types. FIG. 19B is a setting example of the determination rate of the variation pattern by the variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA2 (non-reach (miss))” among the above eight types. FIG. 19C is a setting example of the determination rate of the variation pattern by the variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA3 (normal reach (miss))” among the above eight types. Hereinafter, the same applies to FIGS. 19D to 19H.

As described above, in the main board 11, in the start winning determination processing of S101, the transmission setting for transmitting the start mouth winning designation command according to the start opening buffer value is performed to the effect control board 12 (S219). ), S403, S404, S409, etc., the transmission setting for transmitting the symbol designating command according to the special figure display result is performed (S405, S407, S410), according to the variation category determined in S412. The transmission setting for transmitting the variable category command (S413) is performed, and the transmission setting for transmitting the reserved storage number notification command is performed (S221).

After these processes are executed, by executing the command control process of S17 shown in FIG. 11, the game ball passes (enters) the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). When the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, a start mouth winning designation command (first start mouth winning designation command or second start mouth winning designation command), a symbol designating command, a variable category command, a reserved memory number notification command Four commands (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command) are collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt as one set.

Further, in the main board 11, in the special symbol normal process of S110, the fixed special symbol which is the variable display result of the special symbol is obtained by using the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the like. In the variation pattern setting process of S111, the variation pattern of the decorative pattern is determined using the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category, the random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern, and the like.

Further, in the variation pattern setting process of S111, a variable display result notification command for designating the fixed special symbol determined as described above, a variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern of the decorative pattern determined as described above, and the like are produced. Transmission settings for transmission to the control board 12 are performed. When variable display is started by executing the command control process of S17 shown in FIG. 11 after these processes are executed, the variable display result notification command, the variation pattern designation command, etc. are set within one timer interrupt. It is sent in a batch. Note that the commands are not limited to being transmitted collectively within one timer interrupt, and one command may be sequentially transmitted by the command control processing of S17 for each timer interrupt.

That is, at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol display process (variable display result of the special symbol) in the special symbol normal process (S110) is set as "big hit" or "small hit" and the big hit game state. Whether or not to control to the small hitting gaming state is made, and in the variation pattern setting process (S111), a specific variable display mode (variation pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined, etc. The content determined by is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Further, prior to this, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening), a "big hit" or "small hit" is made by the random number determination process at the time of winning (S220). As a "hit", it is determined whether or not it is controlled to a big hit game state or a small hit game state, a rough variable display mode (variation category) of a decorative design, etc. is determined, and determined by each production control command. The content is transmitted to the production control board 12.

Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described.
In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 20 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and mount the effect control board 12. The CTC (counter/timer circuit) registers are set. After that, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (S72; No), the process of S72 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like from the main board 11 occurs in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt processing, a control such as an effect control command is performed from a predetermined input port of the input ports included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. Capture the signal.

The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194, for example. As an example, when the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON in S72 (S72; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the OFF state (S73), and the command analysis process is executed (S74). In the command analysis process executed in S74, for example, after the various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer are read, the read operation is performed. Settings and controls corresponding to the production control commands are performed.

After executing the command analysis process in S74, the effect control process process is executed (S75). In the effect control process process of S75, various effect devices such as an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, a voice output operation from the speaker 8, a light emission operation in the lamp 9, and a drive operation in the effect model are performed. With respect to the control contents of the effect operation used, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the production control process processing of S75, production random number update processing is executed (S76), and the production random numbers counted by the random counter of the production control counter setting unit 193 are shown as various random number values used for production control. Numerical data is updated by software. Then, the process returns to S72.

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in S74 of FIG. 20 as command analysis processing. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 21, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms the stored contents of the effect control command reception buffer to confirm that the received command from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 is received. It is determined whether there is any (S501). At this time, if there is no received command (S501; No), the command analysis process ends.

If there is a received command in S501 (S501; Yes), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether or not the received command is the first start mouth winning designation command (S502). .. Then, when the command is the first start opening winning award designation command (S502; Yes), the first waiting storage number notification waiting time is set (S503). For example, in the process of S503, if a timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first reserved storage number notification command is set in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192. Good.

If the received command is not the first start mouth prize designation command in S502 (S502; No), it is determined whether the received command is the second start mouth prize designation command (S504). Then, when the command is the second start opening winning award designation command (S504; Yes), the second waiting storage number notification waiting time is set (S505). For example, in the processing of S505, the command reception control timer may be set to a timer initial value that is predetermined in correspondence with the reception waiting time of the second reserved storage number notification command.

When the received command is not the second start mouth winning designation command in S504 (S504; No), it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designation command (S506). When the received command is not the symbol designating command in S506 (S506; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is the variable category command (S507). When the received command is not the variable category command in S507 (S507; No), it is determined whether the received command is the first reserved storage number notification command (S508). Then, when the command is the first reserved storage number notification command (S508; Yes), the first reserved storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (S509).

If the received command is not the first reserved storage number notification command in S508 (S508; No), it is determined whether the received command is the second reserved storage number notification command (S510). When it is the second reserved storage number notification command (S510; Yes), the second reserved storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the time counting operation by the command reception control timer (S511).

If the received command is a symbol designating command in S506 (S506; Yes), if the received command is a variable category command in S507 (S507; Yes), or any of the processes of S503, S505, S509, and S511 is executed. After that, if the first reserved storage number notification waiting time is set in the process of S503 for the received command received immediately before the received command, the received command is received in the first start winning award received command buffer 194A. After being stored at the beginning of the empty area in (S512), the process returns to S501.

If the received command is a symbol designating command in S506 (S506; Yes), the received command is a variable category command in S507 (S507; Yes), or any of the processes of S503, S505, S509, and S511. After executing, if the second hold storage number notification waiting time is set in the process of S503 for the reception command received immediately before the reception command, the reception command is set to the second start winning command reception command. After storing at the beginning of the free area in the buffer 194B (S512), the process returns to S501.

In addition, when the first reserved storage number notification command is received together with the first variation start command, the reserved storage number notification command may not be stored in the first start winning award reception command buffer 194A. That is, it is sufficient that the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the first start winning time reception command buffer 194A.

Further, when the second reserved storage number notification command is received together with the second variation start command, the reserved storage number notification command does not have to be stored in the second start prize winning time reception command buffer 194B. That is, it is sufficient that the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the second starting winning time reception command buffer 194B.

If the received command is not the second reserved storage number notification command in S510 (S510; No), settings are made according to other received commands (S513), and then the process returns to S501. For example, when the received command is a game state designation command, the game state designation command is analyzed to specify the current game state. Further, for example, when the received command is a hit end designation command, the hit end designation command is analyzed to specify whether or not the time is short.

Starting mouth winning designation command (first starting mouth winning designation command or second starting mouth winning designation command), symbol designating command, variation category command, pending storage number notification command (first pending storage number notification command, second pending storage number Like the notification command), the effect control command received from the main board 11 when the start winning is generated is also called a command at the time of starting winning. The first reserved storage number notification command, the second reserved storage number notification command, the first starting mouth winning designation command, and the second starting mouth winning designation command are also referred to as reserved storage information. The symbol designating command and the variation category command are also referred to as determination result information.

When the received commands are sequentially stored from the beginning of the free area in the first start winning prize reception command buffer 194A, whether the received command is a symbol designating command, a variation category command, or a first reserved memory number notification command The received commands may be stored without distinction, or each received command may be distinguished and stored at the beginning of the empty area in the corresponding storage area.

Further, when the received commands are sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the second start winning prize reception command buffer 194B, it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designating command, a variation category command, or a second reserved storage number notification command. The received commands may be stored without distinction, or each received command may be distinguished and stored at the beginning of the empty area in the corresponding storage area.

22 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in S75 of FIG. 20 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 22, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prize time effect determination process (S150). FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S150 of FIG. 22 as the winning effect determination process.

23, in the effect determination process at the time of winning prize shown in FIG. 23, the CPU 120 for effect control first stores the stored contents in the reception command buffer at the time of starting winning (the first receiving command buffer 194A at the time of starting winning and the second receiving command buffer 194B at the time of starting winning). It is checked (S151), and it is determined whether or not the first start mouth winning designation command is received as a new received command (S152). When it is determined in S152 that the first start winning combination designation command has not been received (S152; No), the stored content in the second start winning combination reception command buffer 194B is checked (S153), and as a new reception command, It is determined whether or not the second starting opening winning a prize designation command is received (S153). When it is determined in S154 that the second start opening winning award designation command is not received (S154; No), the winning effect determination process is ended.

When it is determined in S152 that the first start mouth winning award designation command is received (S152; Yes), when it is specified in the process of S513 in the command analysis process of FIG. 21 that the time is not shortened (S155 : NO), the first hold effect determination process is executed (S160). The first hold effect determination process includes a process of determining a display mode (also referred to as a display mode during addition) of the hold display when the additional display is performed in the first starting prize winning memory display area 5HL. In addition, when executing the hold change effect or the hold change change effect for the hold display at the time of additionally displaying in the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL, in the step, whether the hold change effect or the hold change effect effect is executed. A process of deciding whether or not to execute, a process of deciding the execution timing of the holding effect when it is decided to execute the holding effect, and the like may be performed.

First, the determination process for determining the display mode of the hold display at the time of additionally displaying in the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL will be described. FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display. It is assumed that the ROM 121 stores seven types of hold display mode determination tables according to the variation category. FIG. 24(A) is a hold display mode selected when the variation category is “PA1 (shortening/non-reach loss)” or the variation category “PA2 (non-reach (loss))” among the seven types described above. It is a setting example (H-TBL1) of the determination rate of the display mode of the hold display by the determination table. FIG. 24B is a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA3 (normal reach (miss))” among the seven types described above ( H-TBL 2). FIG. 24C shows the setting of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA4 (super reach α (miss))” among the seven types described above. It is an example (H-TBL3).

FIG. 24D is a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display form determination table selected when the variation category is “PA5 (super reach β (miss)” among the above seven types. 24(E) is a display of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PB3 (normal reach (big hit))” among the above-mentioned seven types. 24F is an example of setting the determination rate of the mode (H-TBL5), which is selected when the variation category is “PB4 (super reach α (big hit))” among the seven types described above. 24G is a setting example (H-TBL6) of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display according to the display mode determination table, and the variation category “PB5 (super reach β (big hit)) among the seven types described above. Is a setting example (H-TBL7) of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display according to the hold display mode determination table selected when "".

According to FIG. 24, the display modes of the hold display are determined by the tables (A) to (G), and the types of the determined display modes are roughly classified into two. One is a “sphere”. The other is a "humanoid character". Examples of "spheres" are shown in Figures 29A-36B. Examples of "humanoid characters" are shown in FIGS.

When the display mode of the "human character" is determined in the table of FIG. 24, the hold stage effect may be executed. In the hold stage effect by the "humanoid character", for example, after the hold display is performed in the display mode of the "humanoid character", the display mode of the humanoid character is changed every time the previously held memory is exhausted, and then the humanoid character is displayed. When the variation based on the hold display of the display mode of the character is executed, as an active display, all the "humanoid characters" that have changed so far are brought together to appear. Details of the effect pattern of the holding stage effect will be described later with reference to FIG. In the following description, the "humanoid character" is simply referred to as "character".

The reserved display of "sphere" is displayed as "red sphere" "yellow sphere" "blue sphere" "white sphere" in each table of FIG. With respect to the hold display of the “sphere”, for example, in the case of reach, as compared with the case of non-reach, red or yellow is easily determined, and blue or white (initial color) is difficult to be determined. Also, in the case of a reach, when it is a hot reach (for example, super reach), red or yellow is more likely to be determined, and blue or white is less likely to be determined than when it is a reach that is not hot (for example, normal reach). ing. Alternatively, according to FIG. 16, FIG. 17, and FIG. 24, when the special figure display result is “big hit”, red or yellow is easier to be determined than when the special figure display result is “miss”, and blue or It is difficult to determine the white color. In other words, the red or yellow display mode has a higher degree of expectation that a hot effect will be executed or a larger jackpot than the blue or white display mode. More specifically, in the order of red, yellow, blue, and white, the degree of expectation that a hot effect will be executed and the degree of expectation that a big hit will be high.

The display mode of the hold display of "character" is displayed in each table of FIG. 24 as "changed red character", "changed red character", "changed blue character", and "changed blue character". When "changed red character" is determined, the newly added pending display is changed to the display mode of the red character, and the character changes each time the previous pending storage is exhausted. That is, the holding stage effect is executed. On the other hand, if "red character does not change" is determined, the newly displayed hold display is changed to the display mode of the red character, but the display mode of the character changes when the previous hold storage is exhausted. do not do. Therefore, the type of the character when the hold display is started is the same as the type of the character when the hold display is shifted and the order of the variable display is next.

Except for the color of the character to be displayed, "blue character changed" and "blue character not changed" are the case of "red character changed" and "red character not changed" and the appearance and change of the pending display. Is the same.

According to the table of FIG. 24, as can be understood by referring to the determination rate of the random number MR6, the red character is more likely to be selected than the blue character as the variable display has a higher expectation of a big hit. In addition, as the variable display has a higher expectation of a big hit, it is easier to select the character change presence than the character change absence.

In the first hold effect determination process (S160), the effect control CPU 120, based on the change category specified by the change category command transmitted from the main board 11, of the plurality of hold display mode determination tables shown in FIG. A hold display mode determination table to be used is selected from among the hold display modes to be additionally displayed in the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL based on the selected hold display mode determination table and the random value MR6 for determining the display mode of the hold display. The display mode of display (display mode at the time of addition) is determined. As a result, the display mode of the hold display additionally displayed in the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL is determined to be “sphere” or “character”, and in addition to that color, and in the case of “character”, whether or not there is a character change. Is determined.

After executing the first hold effect determination process (S160), the effect control CPU 120 stores the determination content of the first hold effect determination process based on the determination result of the first hold effect determination process (S161). Specifically, for example, the effect control CPU 120 changes the display mode of the hold display in the first hold effect determination process to the first start prize-winning reception command buffer 194A corresponding to the buffer number of the first start prize. The determination content (display mode at the time of addition) of the first holding effect determination processing is stored in association with the buffer number of the prefetching announcement buffer 194C.

Note that the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the hold change effect in the first hold effect determination process, and when it is determined to execute the hold change effect, the determination content of the hold effect determination process (hold change). Corresponding to the buffer number in the first start winning award reception command buffer 194A corresponding to the execution timing when executing the effect, the execution timing when executing the pending change gase effect, the execution timing when executing the pending change) Corresponding to the buffer number of the 1 pre-reading notice buffer 194C, the determination content of the pending effect determination process (information indicating that the pending change effect is executed (for example, flag), information indicating that the pending change event effect is executed (for example, Flag), information indicating that the hold change is to be executed (for example, flag), and information specifying the hold display changed by the hold effect as the hold display of the target (that is, the hold display by the first start winning) (for example, , A buffer number of the first read-ahead notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number of the first start-winning prize in the first start-winning prize reception command buffer 194A.

In this case, for example, in the first hold effect determination process at the time of the first start winning prize for the third special figure hold memory number 3, the addition display mode “white”, hold effect “execution (hold change effect execution)” If the execution timing is “next variation”, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the buffer number of the first start prize in the first start prize-winning reception command buffer 194A (for example, the buffer number “3”). The display mode “white” at the time of addition is stored in association with the buffer number (buffer number “3”) of the first prefetching advance notice buffer 194C corresponding to the execution timing “next variation”. 1 Start-up winning notification that the pending change effect is executed in association with the buffer number (buffer number “1”) of the first prefetching notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number (buffer number “1”) in the reception command buffer 194A The indicated information and the buffer number “3” may be stored.

In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the hold change effect in the first hold effect determination process, the buffer in the first start winning prize reception command buffer 194A corresponding to the execution timing of the first hold effect determination process. Only the information for specifying the target hold display (hold display by the first start winning) may be stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetching notice buffer 194C corresponding to the number (the hold change effect is executed). It is not necessary to store the information indicating that).

After performing the process of S161, the effect control CPU 120 displays the hold mode determined in the first hold effect determination process (S160) (the first start prize winning buffer in the first start winning combination reception command buffer 194A). Based on the display mode at the time of addition stored in association with the buffer number of the first look-ahead notice buffer 194C corresponding to the number), a new hold display is added to the first start winning award memory display area 5HL. The process is executed (S162). More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first start winning award storage display area 5HL to display a hold display in the additional display mode stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetching notice buffer 194C described above. By setting the control pattern as the usage pattern and transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, the first hold effect The hold display according to the display mode at the time of addition determined in the determination processing is added to the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL. Then, the award winning effect determination process is ended.

If it is determined in S154 that the second start opening winning award designation command is received (S154; Yes), and if it is specified in the processing of S513 in the command analysis processing of FIG. 21 that it is time-saving (S156: YES). ), the second hold effect determination process is executed (S163). The second hold effect determination process includes a process of determining the display mode (also referred to as an additional display mode) of the hold display when the additional display is performed in the second start prize winning storage display area 5HR. As a result, the display mode of the hold display additionally displayed in the second start winning prize memory display area 5HR is determined to be "sphere" or "character", and, in addition, the color and the presence or absence of character change in the case of "character". Is determined. In addition, when executing the hold change effect or the hold change change effect for the hold display when the additional display is performed in the second start winning prize memory display area 5HR, whether the hold change effect or the hold change effect effect is executed in the step. A process of deciding whether or not to execute, a process of deciding the execution timing of the holding effect when it is decided to execute the holding effect, and the like may be performed.

The processes of S163, S164, and S165 relating to the second starting mouth winning are the same as the processes of S160, S161, and S162 relating to the first starting mouth winning, respectively. Can be read as “second” and the code can be read corresponding to the reading, and thus the description is omitted.

When it is determined in S152 that the first start mouth winning award designation command is received (S152; Yes), and when it is specified that the time is shortened in the process of S513 in the command analysis process of FIG. 21 (S155: YES), The effect control CPU 120 determines the display mode of the first hold display to be additionally displayed in the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL to be the initial color (white), and sets the stored content in the first start winning award reception command buffer 194A. Corresponding to the same buffer number as the corresponding buffer number, the first reserved display in white display mode is added to the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL (S166). Then, the award winning effect determination process is ended.

When it is determined in S154 that the second start opening winning award designation command is received (S154; Yes), and it is specified in the process of S513 in the command analysis process of FIG. 21 that it is not time-saving (S156: YES). ), the production control CPU 120 determines the display mode of the second hold display to be additionally displayed in the second start winning award memory display area 5HR to the normal display (white ball), and in the second start winning award reception command buffer 194B. The second hold display in the normal display (white ball) display mode is added to the second start winning award memory display area 5HR in association with the same buffer number as the buffer number corresponding to the stored content (S166). Then, the award winning effect determination process is ended.

After executing the winning effect determination process of S150 shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, for example, in accordance with the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191, the following S170 to 177 Select and execute one of the processes.

The variable display start waiting process of S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" which is the initial value. This variable display start waiting process is performed based on whether the first variation start command (or the second variation start command), the variation pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command, etc. transmitted from the main board 11 are received. It includes a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the display device 5. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1".

The variable display start setting process of S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". This variable display start setting process corresponds to the variable display of the special symbol being started in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the decorative symbol in the image display device 5. Process to determine the fixed decorative symbol according to the variation pattern of the special symbol and the type of the display result to perform variable display and other various staging operations, and the first hold display or the second hold display is shifted to be active. Processing for displaying a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the first hold display or the second hold display in the display area AHA, various effects and effect modes of various effects (for example, active display which is a main notice effect) It includes a change effect, a process of determining an effect mode of the active display change effect, and the like. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2".

The variable display effect process in S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the effect display during variable display, the effect control CPU 120, based on the effect control pattern determined in the variable display start setting process, corresponding to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192. Then, various control data are read out, and various effect control (for example, variable display control of decorative design during variable display of decorative design) is performed. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 outputs the video signal (effect image) to the image display device 5 and displays it on the screen based on the read control data, and outputs the effect sound signal to the voice control board 13. Then, various effect controls such as control for outputting effect sound from the speaker 8 and control for outputting an illumination signal to the lamp control board 14 to turn on/off/blink the lamp 9 are executed.

After performing such effect control, for example, in response to the fact that the end code indicating the variable display end of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. , The fixed decorative design as the final stopped design resulting in the variable display of the decorative design is completely stopped and displayed. If the fixed decorative pattern is completely stopped and displayed in response to the end code being read from the effect control pattern, when the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed, Even if the production control command from the main board 11 is not used, the final display pattern can be autonomously derived and displayed on the side of the production control board 12 to confirm the variable display result. When the fixed decorative pattern is completely stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3".

The special figure waiting process in S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". In this special figure winning wait process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. Then, when the hit start designation command is received and the hit start designation command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is "6" which is a value corresponding to the big hit medium effect processing. To update. On the other hand, when the hit start designation command is received, if the hit start designation command designates the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hit. Is updated to "4". When the effect control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is "miss", and the value of the effect process flag is the initial value. Update to "0".

The effect process during small hit in S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "4". In the effect processing during the small hit, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, reads various control data based on the setting content, and changes in S172. Similar to the display effect during display, by outputting a video signal, an effect sound signal, an electric signal, etc., various effect controls in the small hitting game state are executed. Further, in the small hit mid effect production process, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5" which is a value corresponding to the small hit end production in response to receiving the hit end designation command from the main board 11, for example. ..

The small hit end production process of S175 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, etc., and reads out various control data based on the setting contents, and changes in S172. Similar to the display effect processing, various effect controls at the end of the small hitting game state are executed by outputting a video signal, an effect sound signal, an illumination signal, or the like. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value.

The big hit mid-game production process of S176 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "6". In this big hit mid production processing, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, a production control pattern or the like corresponding to the production content in the big hit gaming state, reads out various control data based on the setting content, and performs variable display in S172. Similar to the effect process, by outputting a video signal, an effect sound signal, an illumination signal, etc., various effect controls in the big hit game state are executed. Further, in the big hit midfield effect process, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "7" which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving the hit end designation command from the main board 11, for example.

The ending effect process of S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit game state, reads out various control data based on the setting contents, and effects the variable display during S172. Similar to the processing, by outputting a video signal, a performance sound signal, an electric signal, etc., various performance controls at the end of the big hit game state are executed. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S171 of FIG. 22 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 25, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and the special figure display result is “missed”. It is determined whether or not (S522). When it is determined that the special figure display result is “miss” (S522; Yes), the specified variation pattern is obtained by reading the EXT data in the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, for example. It is a non-reach variation pattern (that is, "PA1-1" "PA2-1" "PA2-2" "PA2-3" in FIG. 5) corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach". It is determined whether or not (S523).

When it is determined in S523 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (S523; Yes), the combination of the fixed decorative symbols which are the final stop symbols forming the non-reach combination is determined (S524). As an example, in the process of S524, first, the numerical data indicating the random number value for the left definite symbol determination updated by the random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in the ROM 121 or the like in advance. By referring to a predetermined left fixed design determination table, the left fixed decorative design to be stopped and displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 of the fixed decorative design is determined.

Next, the numerical data showing the random number value for the right fixed symbol determination that is updated by the random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and the predetermined right fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to, etc., the right fixed decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative pattern display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 among the fixed decorative patterns is determined. At this time, the design number of the right fixed decorative design may be determined to be different from the design number of the left fixed decorative design by the setting in the right fixed design determination table. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value for medium-decision symbol determination updated by the random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and the predetermined medium-determination symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to, etc., the middle fixed decorative design which is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative design display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 of the fixed decorative designs is determined. In the process of S524, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination that is the predetermined chance eye symbol may be determined corresponding to the case where the variable symbol announcement is being executed.

When it is determined in S523 that it is not the non-reach variation pattern (S523; No), the combination of the fixed decorative symbols which is the final stop symbol forming the reach combination is determined (S525). As an example, in the process of S525, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left/right fixed symbols updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined left/right confirmed symbol determination table, etc., the symbols that are stopped and displayed together in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 among the confirmed decorative symbols The decorative pattern with the same number is determined. Furthermore, the numerical data showing the random number value for medium fixed symbol determination updated by the random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and the predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is displayed. By referring to the determined decorative design, the middle fixed decorative design to be stopped and displayed in the "medium" decorative design display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined.

Here, when the fixed decorative design is a big hit combination, for example, when the design number of the medium fixed decorative design is the same as the design number of the left fixed decorative design and the right fixed decorative design, an arbitrary value is set. By adding or subtracting (for example, "1") to the symbol number of the medium fixed decorative design, the fixed decorative design may be a reach combination instead of a big hit combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium fixed decorative design, the difference (design difference) between the left fixed decorative design and the right fixed decorative design is determined, and the medium fixed decorative design corresponding to the determined difference may be set. ..

When it is determined in S522 that the special figure display result is not "miss" (S522; No), the special figure display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probable", or the special figure display result is " It is determined whether it is a "small hit" or other cases (S526). When it is determined to be a "probability" or a "small hit" (S526; Yes), for example, a final decorative design which is the final stop design corresponding to the "probable" or "small hit" such as the opening chance. The combination is determined (S527). In this case, numerical data indicating a random number value for chance chance determination that is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined chance chance determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to, etc., the combination of the fixed decorative patterns forming any of the opening chances may be determined.

When it is determined in S526 that it is a "non-probable change" or a "probable change" other than "probability" or "small hit" (S526; No), the combination of the fixed decorative symbols which are the final stop symbols constituting the big hit combination is determined. Yes (S528). As an example, in the process of S528, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the jackpot finalized symbol updated by a random counter or the like of the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and subsequently, a predetermined value stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to the jackpot determination symbol determination table, etc., the symbols that are stopped and displayed together in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 The decorative pattern with the same number is determined. At this time, depending on whether the big hit type is "non-probable change" or "probable change", whether or not promotion effect during the big hit, and the like, a different decorative design may be determined to be the fixed decorative design.

As a specific example, when the jackpot type is “non-probable variation”, one of the plurality of types of normal symbols is selected to be determined as a definite decorative symbol that constitutes the non-probable variation jackpot combination. Good. Further, when the jackpot type is "probable variation", any one of the decorative patterns is selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols or probabilistic symbols, and a definite decorative jackpot combination or a definite decorative jackpot combination is formed. You can decide to. At this time, when it is determined to be a fixed decorative pattern of a non-probability variation big hit combination, the notification that the probability variation state is controlled in the re-lottery effect in the variable display is not given, and it is executed corresponding to the big hit game state. It is only necessary to be informed that it is controlled to be in a probable state by a promotion effect during a big hit. On the other hand, when the fixed decorative pattern of the probability variation big hit combination is determined, in the re-lottery effect that is variably displayed, or without executing the re-lottery effect, the notification that the probability variation state is controlled is given.

When it is specified in the processing of S513 in the command analysis processing of FIG. 21 that the time is not shortened (S155: NO), after executing any of the processing of S524, S525, S527, and S528, the pending digest processing is executed. Yes (S531). Specifically, the active display corresponding to the fluctuation is displayed in the active display area AHA (in other words, the special image including the active display corresponding to the fluctuation is displayed). For example, when the variation of the decorative design is started in conjunction with the first special drawing game (when the variable display of the decorative design this time is linked to the first special drawing game), the first start winning prize memory display area The active display corresponding to the hold display displayed on the right end of the 5HL is displayed in the active display area AHA (the special image including the active display corresponding to the hold display displayed on the right end of the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL). Is displayed). More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 moves the active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL to the active display area AHA to display the active display. Is set as a usage pattern, and the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. The active display area AHA displays the active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the area 5HL. The active display in the active display area AHA may be displayed in the same mode as the hold display, or may be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the hold display but different from the hold display. The same applies when the variation of the decorative design is started in conjunction with the second special figure game.

In the process of S531, the effect control CPU 120 first starts the other hold display when there is a hold display in addition to the hold display (active display) to be exhausted in the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL. If there is a hold display in addition to the active display in the second start prize storage display area 5HR, the other hold display is shifted in the second start prize storage display area 5HR.

After executing the process of S531, the effect execution setting process is executed (S532). The effect execution setting process includes a process of deciding whether or not to execute the active display change effect for the active display corresponding to the variation, a process of deciding the type of the active display change effect at the time of execution, and an active process at the time of execution. A process of determining the effect mode of the display change effect, a process of determining the execution timing of the active display change effect at the time of execution, a hold stage effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 40, as the hold storage is shifted due to the change. Process for confirming whether or not to execute the effect of changing the character of the hold display, process for checking the mode of the hold display after the change when executing the hold stage effect, and an effect control pattern based on these process results. A process for setting (or resetting) is included. Since the presence/absence of execution of the hold stage effect and the change in the display mode of the hold display when it is executed are previously determined in S160 or S163 of FIG. 23, the determination result is referred to in S532.

After the processing of S532 is executed, the execution setting of the other variable display is performed (S533). As an example, in the process of S533, the execution setting of “one-shot notification effect” may be performed to immediately notify (confirmatively notify) that the variable display result will be “big hit” due to the big hit notification sound or the big hit notification light emission. .. An example of the big hit notification sound is an alarm sound, a chime sound, a siren sound, or the like. An example of the big hit notification light emission is light emission of a flash lamp that constitutes the light emitting member 9CC. Further, in the process of S533, regardless of whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit", for example, it may be set such that a predetermined aspect of the effect is executed for bustling. For example, the effect may be set such that a predetermined lamp 9 (for example, the light emitting members 9SL and 9SR) emits light.

After the process of S533 is executed, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 is set corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command, for example (S534). Subsequently, a variable display start setting process for setting a change of the decorative pattern or the like in the image display device 5 is executed (S535). For example, by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data, which is included in the effect control pattern set as the use pattern in the effect execution setting process of S532, to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, or the like. The sound output from the speaker 8 is performed by setting to start the variation of the decorative pattern on the screen of No. 5 and transmitting the effect sound signal specified by the sound control data included in the effect control pattern to the sound control board 13. Settings for starting the light emission, and setting for starting the light emission of the lamp 9 are performed by transmitting an illumination signal specified by the lamp control data included in the effect control pattern to the lamp control board 14.

After the processing of S535 is executed, the command stored in the first start-up winning prize reception command buffer 194A or the second start-winning prize reception command buffer 194B is consumed (S536). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 has the smallest command among the commands associated with the first start prize-winning reception command buffer 194A when the variable display of the decorative design is started in synchronization with the first special figure game. The command (1 set) stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number that is larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (the first start mouth prize designation command The command associated with is shifted while maintaining the winning order.When the variable display of the decorative pattern is started in synchronization with the second special figure game, it is stored in the second start winning time received command buffer. The command (1 set) stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command is won. Shift while maintaining the order.

Further, in the processing of S536, the information stored in the first prefetching notice buffer 194C or the second prefetching notice buffer 194D provided in the RAM 122 or the like is also deleted or shifted according to the deletion or shift of the command. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2" which is the value corresponding to the effect display during variable display (S537), and the variable display start setting process is ended.

Here, the effect execution setting process (S532) will be described in detail. First, a process of deciding whether to execute the active display change effect for the active display corresponding to the variation, and a process of deciding the type of the active display change effect when it is decided to execute the active display change effect (which active A process of determining whether to execute the display change effect) will be described.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an effect pattern table during hold selection. In particular, FIG. 26A shows an example of setting the determination rate based on the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table. Further, FIG. 26B shows a combination of the change pattern of the holding stage effect and the active display pattern.

Specifically, the setting example of FIG. 26A shows whether or not to execute the active display change effect, and the active display when executing the type of the active display change effect (which active display change effect is to be executed). It is an example of setting the determination rate of the effect mode of the change effect. In the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table, the numerical values (decision values) to be compared with the random number value MR7 (not shown) for determining the presence/absence of execution of the active display change effect are “execution performed” and “execution not performed”. 26 are assigned to each of the above at a determined rate as shown in FIG. Further, in the “execution” of the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR7 for determination (not shown) is “first system change effect” and “first system change effect”. The "second system change effect" and the "first system change effect and the second system change effect" are assigned at the determined ratios as shown in FIG. 26(A). Further, the first system change effect includes a plurality of types of effect modes having similar effect modes. The second system change effect includes a plurality of types of effect modes having similar effect modes. Specifically, the first system change effect is an effect that affects the display mode of the active display, and the second system change effect is an effect that affects the display mode of the active display frame. The target acting on the second system change effect is different.

It should be noted that "execution available" and "first system change effect" indicate that the first system change effect is performed as an active display change effect, and "execution enabled" and "second system change effect" indicate the second system change effect. This means that it is performed as an active display change effect, and “execution performed”, “first system change effect and second system change effect” means that both the first system change effect and the second system change effect are changed by active display. Indicates that the performance will be performed. Further, "no execution" represents that the active display change effect is not performed. Further, the fluctuation pattern 1-X represents the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 shown in FIG. 5, and the fluctuation pattern PA2-X represents any of the fluctuation patterns PA2-1, PA2-2, PA2-3 shown in FIG. , The fluctuation pattern PA3-X represents one of the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 shown in FIG. 5, and the fluctuation pattern PA4 represents the fluctuation patterns PA4-1, PA4-2, PA4-3 shown in FIG. Indicates any one of PA4-4. The same applies to the fluctuation patterns PA5-X, PB4-X, PB5-X.

According to FIG. 26A, when the variation pattern (variable display pattern) of the variation (variable display) designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation patterns PA1-X and PA2-X, “no execution is performed”. Is 100%, indicating that neither the first system change effect nor the second system change effect is executed. That is, when the variation is non-reach (miss), the active display change effect is not executed.

When the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation patterns PB3-X, PB4-X, PB5-X, the fluctuation patterns PA3-X, PA4-X, PA5-X are used. Compared to some cases, the rate of determining “no execution” is low. That is, the rate at which the active display change effect is executed when the "big hit" occurs in the variation is higher than the rate at which the active display change effect is performed when the "miss" occurs in the variation. That is, when the active display change effect is executed, the degree of expectation of a "big hit" is higher than when the active display change effect is not executed.

When the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation patterns PB3-X, PB4-X, PB5-X, it is the fluctuation patterns PA3-X, PA4-X, PA5-X. Compared to the case, the ratio of determining “first system change effect and second system change effect” when “execution is performed” is higher. For example, in the case of the variation pattern PB3-X, the proportion of the "first system change effect and the second system change effect" that is determined when "executed" is determined is about 57% (40/70). On the other hand, in the case of the variation pattern PA3-X, the proportion of the “first system change effect and the second system change effect” determined when “execution performed” is about 33% (10÷30). Is. Alternatively, in more detail, which of the fluctuation patterns PA3-X to PA5-X the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is, or which of the fluctuation patterns PB3-X to PB5-X. The difference (or ratio) in the ratios in which the "first system change effect and the second system change effect" are determined is that the change pattern of the change specified by the change pattern specifying command is the change patterns PA3-X to PA5-. The difference between the proportions in which the “first system change effect” or the “second system change effect” is determined depending on which of the X and the variation patterns PB3-X to PB5-X is larger. For example, when the change pattern is PB3-X, the proportion of "first system change effect and second system change effect" is determined, and when it is the change pattern PA3-X, "first system change effect and second system change effect". While the difference with the proportion in which the "production" is determined is 30% (40%-10%), the proportion and the variation pattern in which the "first system change presentation" is determined when the variation pattern is PB3-X. The difference from the rate at which the "first system change effect" is determined when it is PA3-X is 5% (15%-10%). That is, when the first system change effect and the second system change effect are executed, the degree of expectation of a "big hit" is higher than when not.

Further, when the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation patterns PA4-X, PA5-X, PB4-X, PB5-X, it is the fluctuation patterns PA3-X, PB3-X. Compared with the case, the rate of determining “no execution” is low. In other words, the rate at which the active display change effect is executed when the change reaches the super reach is higher than the rate at which the active display change effect is executed when the change reaches the normal reach. That is, when the active display change effect is executed, the degree of expectation of super-reach is higher than when the active display change effect is not executed.

Similarly, when the first system change effect and the second system change effect are executed, the degree of expectation of super-reach is higher than when not.

Next, the setting example of FIG. 26B shows a pending change pattern and an active display pattern when the display mode of the pending display is determined to be “character” based on the table shown in FIG. Hereinafter, description will be given based on the setting example of FIG. In this embodiment, two types of characters identified by two colors, red and blue, are prepared. Further, four types of characters A, B, C, and D having different appearances are prepared for both the red character and the blue character. That is, in the present embodiment, a total of eight types of characters that are distinguished by color and appearance are prepared. In addition, in order to simplify the description, in the present embodiment, the characters A to D are characters in which the characters A to D are drawn on the face portion (see FIGS. 40 to 42 ).

In the left shoulder column of FIG. 26B, “holding number when holding is held and selected holding display mode” indicates which holding display is to be newly displayed and whether the holding display It indicates whether the display mode is "red character changed", "blue character changed", "red character not changed", or "blue character changed".

For example, when the pending storage occurs while three pending displays (reserved storage) already exist, the fourth pending display (reserved storage) to be displayed is the fourth one. In addition, the table shown in FIG. 24 is used to determine whether the display mode of the hold display is “red character changed”, “blue character changed”, “red character not changed”, or “blue character changed”. Will be decided.

The "when the red or blue character change is selected as the fourth hold display" shown in FIG. 26B is shown in FIG. 24 when a new hold storage occurs when there are already three hold displays. It means that the pending display mode is determined to be the character change with the red character or the blue character based on the table. In this case, the newly generated hold storage is displayed as a hold display at the "holding fourth" position, and eventually the "holding fourth" position to the "holding third" position each time the holding storage is exhausted. Further, a shift operation is performed to move to the position of "second hold" and finally to the position of "first hold". Each of the "holding display change patterns" in FIG. 26B shows a change in the holding display mode when the holding display shifts in such a manner.

As shown in FIG. 26(B), in the case of "when the red or blue character change is selected as the fourth hold display", first, a red or blue D character is newly displayed at the "fourth hold display" position. It Next, when one reserved memory is exhausted, the reserved display shifts, but the C character is displayed at the "third reserved" position after the shift. That is, the character changes from the D character to the C character. Note that the color does not change in this example. Similarly, when one more reserved memory is consumed, the reserved display shifts, and the B character is displayed at the position of the "second reserved display", and when one reserved memory is subsequently consumed, the reserved display shifts further. Then, the A character is displayed at the position of "first hold display". In this way, each time the reserved storage is exhausted, the mode of the reserved display changes in the shift destination in the order of D character→C character→B character→A character. Eventually, when the order of variable display comes, the character changes from the image on hold display to the image on active display, but the display mode at that time is a mode in which all the characters that have appeared so far are displayed (set Display). Therefore, the player can understand how the pending display has changed depending on the mode of the active display.

"When red or blue character change is selected as the third hold display" means that when new hold storage occurs when there are already two hold displays, the hold display mode is based on the table shown in FIG. Means that a red character or a blue character is determined to have a character change. In the case of “with red or blue character change selected as third hold display”, first, a red or blue C character is newly displayed at the position of “third hold”. Next, when one reserved memory is exhausted, the reserved display shifts, but the B character is displayed at the "second reserved" position after the shift. That is, the character changes from the C character to the B character. In this example, the color of the character does not change. Similarly, when one more reserved memory is consumed, the reserved display is shifted and the A character is displayed at the position of "first reserved display". In this way, each time the reserved storage is used up, the mode of the reserved display changes from C character→B character→A character at the shift destination. Eventually, when the order of variable display comes, the character changes from the image on hold display to the image on active display, but the display mode at that time is a mode in which all the characters that have appeared so far are displayed (set Display).

"When red or blue character change is selected as the second hold display" means that when new hold storage occurs when there is already one hold display, the hold display mode is based on the table shown in FIG. Means that a red character or a blue character is determined to have a character change. In "when red or blue character change is selected as second hold display", a red or blue B character is newly displayed at the position of "second hold". Next, when one reserved memory is consumed, the reserved display shifts, but the A character is displayed at the "first reserved" position after the shift. Eventually, when the order of variable display comes, the character changes from the image on hold display to the image on active display, but the display mode at that time is a mode in which all the characters that have appeared so far are displayed (set Display).

“When red or blue character change is selected as the first hold display” means that when new hold storage occurs at a stage where there is no hold display, the hold display mode is based on the table shown in FIG. Means that a red character or a blue character is determined to have a character change. In the case of "with red or blue character change selected as first hold display", first, a red or blue A character is newly displayed at the position of "first hold". However, since this hold display is a hold display in which the order of the variable display comes as soon as one hold memory is exhausted, when the order of the variable display comes, the character changes from the hold display image to the active display image. To do. Therefore, there is no change in the hold display. In the active display, the display mode (collective display) in which the character A is displayed as the character that has appeared so far is adopted.

"When no red or blue character change is selected as the fourth hold display" shown in FIG. 26(B) is shown in FIG. 24 when new hold storage occurs when there are already three hold displays. It means that the pending display mode is determined to be the red character or the blue character without changing the character based on the table. In this case, in the newly generated pending storage, a red or blue D character is newly displayed as a pending display at the "fourth pending" position. Eventually, each time the reserved memory is exhausted, the "reserved fourth" position moves to the "reserved third" position, the "reserved second" position, and finally the "reserved first" position. Moving. However, since the character does not change, the character does not change in any case, and the D character is maintained. Eventually, when the order of variable display comes, the character changes from the image of the hold display to the image of the active display. The display mode at that time is the mode in which the characters that have appeared so far are displayed, that is, the D character. Is displayed.

"When red or blue character change is not selected as the third hold display" means that when new hold storage occurs when there are already two hold displays, the hold display mode is based on the table shown in FIG. Means that the character has been determined to be a red character or a blue character and the character has not changed. In this case, a red or blue C character is newly displayed at the "third hold" position, and the C character does not change even if the hold display shifts thereafter. Eventually, when the order of the variable display comes, the character changes from the image of the hold display to the image of the active display. The display mode at that time is the mode in which the characters that have appeared so far are displayed, that is, the C character. Is displayed.

"When no red or blue character change is selected as the second hold display" means that when new hold storage occurs when there is already one hold display, the hold display mode is based on the table shown in FIG. Means that the character has been determined to be a red character or a blue character and the character has not changed. In this case, a red or blue B character is newly displayed at the "second hold" position, and the B character does not change even if the hold display shifts thereafter. Eventually, when the order of variable display comes, the character changes from the image on hold display to the image on active display. The display mode at that time is the mode in which the characters that have appeared so far are displayed, that is, the B character. Is displayed.

"When no red or blue character change is selected as the first hold display" means that when new hold storage occurs when no hold display exists, the hold display mode is based on the table shown in FIG. Means that the character has been determined to be a red character or a blue character and has not changed. In this case, a red or blue A character is newly displayed at the "first reserved" position, and when the order of variable display comes, the character changes from the reserved display image to the active display image. In the active display, the character A has been displayed as the character that has appeared so far.

Now, returning to FIG. 25 again, the variable display start setting process will be described further. In the effect execution setting process (S532), the effect control CPU 120 executes a process for realizing the pending change pattern and the active display pattern as described with reference to FIG. 26B, for example. As a result, when the hold display is shifted according to the hold consumption, the type of the character functioning as the hold display changes at the shift destination. Alternatively, when the variation based on the hold display of the character displayed at the first hold position is started, the character according to the pattern of FIG. 26B is displayed in the active display area.

Further, in the effect execution setting process (S532), the effect control CPU 120 specifies the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table, the random value MR7 for determining the active display change effect execution presence/absence, and the variation pattern designation command. Whether to execute the active display change effect depending on the change pattern (variable display pattern) of the change (variable display). , Which active display change effect is to be executed is determined.

It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the active display change effect, and when it is determined to “execute”, “first system change effect”, “second system change effect”, or “first system change effect”. And "second system change effect" may be determined.

Next, in the case of active display (fluctuation) for executing the active display change effect, a process of determining the effect mode of the active display change effect to be executed will be described. FIG. 27A is a diagram showing a setting example of the determination rate of the effect mode of the first system change effect when the first system change effect is executed as the active display change effect. FIG. 27B is a diagram showing a setting example of the determination rate of the effect mode of the second system change effect when the second system change effect is executed as the active display change effect. In addition, FIG. 27C shows the determination ratio of the effect mode of the first system change effect and the second system change effect when both the first system change effect and the second system change effect are executed as the active display change effect. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting.

In the illustrated example, the variation pattern 1-X represents the variation pattern PA1-1 shown in FIG. 5, and the variation pattern PA2-X is any of the variation patterns PA2-1, PA2-2, PA2-3 shown in FIG. The fluctuation pattern PA3-X represents any of the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 shown in FIG. 5, and the fluctuation pattern PA4 represents the fluctuation patterns PA4-1, PA4-2 and PA4 shown in FIG. -3 or PA4-4. The same applies to the fluctuation patterns PA5-X, PB4-X, PB5-X.

It is assumed that the ROM 121 stores the active display change effect patterns as the effect modes of the four types of first system change effects corresponding to the 24 kinds of variation patterns shown in FIG. Further, it is assumed that the ROM 21 stores the active display change effect patterns as the effect modes of the three types of second system change effects corresponding to the 24 kinds of variation patterns shown in FIG. Further, the ROM 21 stores 12 types of active display change effect patterns as effect modes of the first system change effect and the second system change effect corresponding to the 24 kinds of variation patterns shown in FIG. To do.

The first system change effect is an effect effect that stimulates a change in the display mode of the active display for the active display, for example, an effect effect that changes the display shape of the active display. In FIG. 27(A), if the active display change effect pattern “BP1” is, by default, the display shape of the active display corresponding to the variation is “sphere”, the display shape of the active display is “sphere”. This is a production pattern of a failure production that does not change as it is (active display change gaze production). According to the illustrated example, when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach), the determination rate is higher than when the reach is hot (for example, super reach). Further, when the variation pattern is “miss” (for example, the variation pattern PA3-1), the determination rate is higher than that of the variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern PB3-1) that is “big hit”.

In addition, the active display change effect pattern “BP2” is an effect effect that changes the display shape of the active display corresponding to the change from the default display shape of “sphere” to the display shape of the active display of “triangle”. It is a pattern. According to the illustrated example, when the variation pattern is “miss” (for example, the variation pattern PA4-1), the determination rate is higher than that of the variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern PB4-1) that is “big hit”. high. Further, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the decision rate is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach).

In addition, the active display change effect pattern “BP3” is a success effect effect in which the display shape of the active display corresponding to the change is changed from the default display shape “sphere” to the display shape of the “pentagon” active display. It is a pattern. According to the illustrated example, when the variation pattern is the “big hit” (for example, the variation pattern PB3-1), the determination rate is higher than that of the variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern PA3-1) that is the “miss”. high. Further, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the decision rate is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach).

In addition, the active display change effect pattern “BP4” is an effect effect that changes the display shape of the active display corresponding to the variation from the default display shape of “sphere” to the active display shape of “star”. It is a pattern. According to the illustrated example, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the determination rate is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach). When the variation pattern is “big hit” (for example, variation pattern PB5-1), the determination rate is higher than that of the variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PA5-1) that is “miss”.

The second system change effect is an effect effect that fuels a change in the display mode of the active display frame targeting the active display frame, for example, an effect effect that fuels a change in the line thickness of the active display frame. In FIG. 27B, when the active display change effect pattern “CP1” has the line thickness of the active display frame surrounding the active display corresponding to the fluctuation is “normal” as a default, the active display frame is displayed. It is a production pattern of a failure production (active display change gall production) in which the thickness of the line is not changed as "normal". According to the illustrated example, when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach), the determination rate is higher than when the reach is hot (for example, super reach). Further, when the variation pattern is “miss” (for example, the variation pattern PA3-1), the determination rate is higher than that of the variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern PB3-1) that is “big hit”.

The active display change effect pattern “CP2” is an effect pattern of successful effect in which the thickness of the line of the active display frame surrounding the active display is changed from “normal” to “middle thick”. According to the illustrated example, when the variation pattern is “miss” (for example, the variation pattern PA4-1), the determination rate is higher than that of the variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern PB4-1) that is “big hit”. high. Further, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the decision rate is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach).

The active display change effect pattern "CP3" is a success effect effect pattern in which the thickness of the line of the active display frame surrounding the active display corresponding to the change is changed from "normal" to "extremely thick". According to the illustrated example, when the variation pattern is the “big hit” (for example, the variation pattern PB3-1), the determination rate is higher than that of the variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern PA3-1) that is the “miss”. high. Further, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the decision rate is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach).

The first system change effect and the second system change effect include an action effect that fuels a change in the display mode of the active display by the above-described first system change effect and an active display that surrounds the active display by the above-described second system change effect. It is an action effect that performs both an action effect that fuels a change in the display mode of the frame. In FIG. 27C, the active display change effect pattern “AP1” has, by default, the display shape of the active display corresponding to the fluctuation is “sphere” and the thickness of the line of the active display frame surrounding the active display. Is "normal", the display shape of the active display remains "sphere" and the line thickness of the active display frame remains "normal". It is a pattern. According to the illustrated example, when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach), the determination rate is higher than when the reach is hot (for example, super reach). Further, when the variation pattern is “miss” (for example, the variation pattern PA3-1), the determination rate is higher than that of the variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern PB3-1) that is “big hit”.

Further, the active display change effect pattern “AP2” is a success in changing the display shape of the active display to “sphere” and changing the thickness of the line of the active display frame surrounding the active display from “normal” to “middle thick”. It is a production pattern of production. According to the illustrated example, when the variation pattern is “miss” (for example, the variation pattern PA4-1), the determination rate is higher than that of the variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern PB4-1) that is “big hit”. high. Further, when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach), the determination rate is higher than when it is the heat reach (for example, super reach).

In addition, the active display change effect pattern “AP3” is a successful effect in which the display shape of the active display remains “sphere” and the line thickness of the active display frame surrounding the active display is changed from “normal” to “extremely thick”. Is a production pattern. When the variation pattern is “big hit” (for example, variation pattern PB3-1), the determination rate is higher than that for the variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PA3-1) that is “miss”. Further, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the decision rate is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach).

The active display change effect pattern “AP4” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “triangle” and the line thickness of the active display frame is not changed as “normal”. The effect pattern “AP5” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “triangle” and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to “middle thick”, and the active display change effect pattern “AP5” is used. "AP6" is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to "triangle" and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to "extremely thick".

The active display change effect pattern “AP7” is an effect pattern in which the active display display shape is changed to a “pentagon” and the line thickness of the active display frame is not changed to “normal”. The display change effect pattern “AP8” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “pentagon” and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to “middle thick”. The pattern “AP9” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “pentagon” and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to “extremely thick”.

In addition, the active display change effect pattern “AP10” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “star” and the line thickness of the active display frame is not changed as “normal”. The display change effect pattern “AP11” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “star” and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to “middle thick”. The pattern “AP12” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “star” and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to “extremely thick”.

That is, in the effect execution setting process (S532), the effect control CPU 120 uses the random value MR8 for determining the active display change effect pattern and the variation pattern (variable display) of the variation (variable display) designated by the variation pattern designation command. Display pattern), the active display change effect pattern is determined as the effect mode of the active display change effect when executing the active display change effect.

Next, a process of determining the timing of executing the active display change effect in the change will be described. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an example of setting the determination rate by the effect execution timing determination table when executing the first system change effect. It should be noted that the ROM 121 stores a plurality of (for example, four) execution timings of the first system change effect according to the 24 types of variation patterns shown in FIG. 5 as the effect execution timings of the first system change effect. And The timing 1 is, for example, the timing at which the first system change effect is executed at the start of the change, the timing 2 is the timing at which the first system change effect is executed at the pseudo continuous change, and the timing 3 is. The timing at which the first system change effect is executed when the reach is established in the fluctuation, and the timing 4 is the timing at which the first system change effect is executed after the reach is established (during the reach) in the fluctuation. The pseudo continuous change is, for example, when the variable display being changed is temporarily stopped.

Further, the variation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 classified into “successful expectation level “small”” indicate that the expectation level at which the successful performance is executed is “small”, and “successful expectation level “medium”. The fluctuation patterns PA4-1 to PA4-4 and PA5-1 to PA5-4 classified into “are “medium” in which the degree of expectation that the success effect is executed is higher than the above-mentioned degree of success expectation “small”. Represents. In addition, the variation patterns PB3-1 and PB3-2 classified into “successfulness expectation “large”” are “large” in which the expectation that the successful performance is executed is higher than the success expectation “medium”. In the variation patterns PB4-1 to PB4-4 and PB5-1 to PB5-4, which are classified as “successful expectation “maximum””, the expectation that the successful performance is executed is the above-mentioned success expectation “large”. Is higher than the "maximum".

Specifically, in FIG. 27, the variation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 are active display change effect patterns BP1 that are failure effects of the first system change effect, and active displays that are failure effects of the second system change effect. Compared with the ratio determined by the change effect pattern CP1 and the active display change effect pattern AP1 which is the failure effect of the first system change effect and the second system change effect, the ratios determined by the other active display change effect patterns. The degree of success is high and the degree of success expectation at which the success effect can be executed is low, and is classified into the “successful expectation degree “small” as described above.

Further, in FIG. 27, variation patterns PA4-1 to PA4-4, PA5-1 to PA5-4, PB3-1 to PB3-2, PB4-1 to PB4-4 other than the variation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2. , PB5-1 to PA5-4, active display change effect patterns BP2 to BP4 which are successful effects of the first system change effect, active display change effect patterns CP2 to CP3 which are successful effects of the second system change effect, The ratios determined by the active display change effect patterns AP2 to AP12, which are successful effects of the first system change effect and the second system change effect, are higher than the rates determined by the other active display change effect patterns. The degree of expectation of success at which the successful presentation can be executed is higher than that of the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2. That is, there is a high degree of expectation that the success effect can be executed by the variation pattern as shown in FIG.

In the illustrated example, the variation pattern (variable display pattern) of the variation (variable display) designated by the variation pattern designation command is not a pseudo-continuous variation, PA3-1, PA4-1, PA4-2, PA5. -1, PA5-2, PB3-1, PB4-1, PB4-2, PB5-1, PB5-2 indicate that the first system change effect is not executed at the timing 2. According to FIG. 28, when the reach is hot (eg, super reach), the decision rate determined at an earlier timing (eg, timing 1) is higher than when the reach is not hot (eg, normal reach). Further, in the case of the variation pattern of “big hit”, the determination rate determined at the later timing (eg, timing 4) of the first system change effect is higher than that of the variation pattern of “miss”. Further, after the reach is established (for example, timing 3 and timing 4), the degree of expectation of successful production is higher than that before the reach is established (for example, timing 1 and timing 2). Further, after the temporary stop of the variable display in the pseudo continuous fluctuation (for example, timing 3 and timing 4), the expectation of the successful effect is higher than that before the temporary stop of the variable display in the pseudo continuous fluctuation (for example, the timing 1).

That is, in the effect execution setting process (S532), the effect control CPU 120 causes the random number value MR9 for determining the item timing of the active display change effect and the variation pattern of the variation (variable display) designated by the variation pattern designation command. (Variable display pattern) determines the execution timing of the active display change effect when the active display change effect is executed.

At the timing 2, immediately after the start of the re-variable display, for example, at the start of the first re-variable display or the second re-variable display, depending on the number of temporary stoppages of the variable display in the pseudo continuous variation. May be determined as the execution timing of the first system change effect, or the execution timing of the first system change effect may be determined at the plurality of times of execution in a plurality of pseudo continuous fluctuations. Further, the timing 2 at the time of pseudo continuous fluctuation may be after the reach is established, and for example, the execution timing is set so that the timing 2 at the time of pseudo continuous variation is set after the timing 3 at the time of reach establishment in FIG. Alternatively, a plurality of timings including four timings may be set as the execution timing of the first system change effect.

Also, an example of setting the determination ratio of the effect mode of the first system change effect when executing the first system change effect as the active display change effect shown in FIG. 27 and the execution timing of the first system change effect shown in FIG. 28. The ROM 121 may be stored as one table by associating with and. The same applies to the execution timing of the second system change effect and the execution timing of executing both the first system change effect and the second system change effect.

The setting example (not shown) of the determination rate by the execution timing determination table of the second system change effect is the same as the setting example of the determination rate by the effect execution timing determination table at the time of executing the first system change effect as shown in FIG. The example may be the same, or the setting example of the determination rate by the execution timing determination table of the second system change effect may be different from the setting example of the determination rate by the effect execution timing determination table when the first system change effect is executed.

In addition, when it is determined to execute the “first system change effect and the second system change effect” in FIG. 26, the execution timings of the first system change effect and the second system change effect are as shown in FIG. 28. Using the example of setting the determination rate by the execution timing determination table, the first system change effect and the second system change effect may be collectively determined to be executed at the same timing. It may be collectively determined so that the respective execution timings of the system change effect may be different execution timings. Further, when it is determined in FIG. 26 that the “first system change effect and the second system change effect” are to be executed, the respective execution timings of the first system change effect and the second system change effect are as shown in FIG. 28. The execution timing of each of the first system change effect and the second system change effect may be determined separately by using an example of setting the determination ratio by the effect execution timing determination table.

Next, a process of setting (or resetting) an effect control pattern based on the selection result of the active display change effect will be described.

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the active display change effect determined based on the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command transmitted from the main board 11, and when executing the active display change effect, the active display change effect. The effect production pattern and the execution timing of the active display change effect are set as the effect control pattern. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command as an effect control pattern, and effects corresponding to the effect mode of the selected active display change effect. Set the pattern as a production control pattern. When a plurality of effect control patterns corresponding to the change pattern designated by the change pattern designation command are prepared, any one of them is selected and set as the effect control pattern. Then, the effect execution setting process (S532) ends.

Next, a specific example of control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.
On the side of the main board 11 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the first starting condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 updates the first reserved memory number, and when the second starting condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 determines the second reserved memory number. Is updated (S215). The CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category (S217). The CPU 103 determines the special figure display result by using the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the like (S403, S404). The CPU 103 determines the variation category based on the special figure display result, which is the determination result, the number of reserved memories updated in S215, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation category extracted in S217 (S412). The CPU 103 that has determined the variation category sets transmission of a variation category command that specifies the variation category that is the determination result (S413), and executes command control processing (S17). Thereby, the variation category command designating the variation category determined in S412 is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

On the side of the main board 11, when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the CPU 103, in the fluctuation pattern setting process (S111), first, the random value MR3 for fluctuation category determination extracted in S217. Without using, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category is extracted again, and the numerical value data indicating the random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern is extracted. Subsequently, the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation pattern based on the newly extracted numerical value data indicating the random value MR3 for fluctuation category determination and the numerical value data indicating the random value MR5 for fluctuation pattern determination. The CPU 103 that has determined the fluctuation pattern sets transmission of a fluctuation pattern designation command that specifies the fluctuation pattern that is the determination result, and executes command control processing (S17). As a result, the variation pattern designation command or the like for designating the variation pattern determined in S111 is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

On the side of the effect control board 12 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the first start condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120, in the hold effect determination process (S160), the first start prize storage display area 5HL or the second start prize. The display mode (display mode at the time of addition) of the hold display when additionally displaying in the memory display area 5HR is determined. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 stores the determination content of the hold effect determination process (for example, the display mode at the time of addition) in the first readahead notice buffer 194C or the second readahead notice buffer based on the determination result of the hold effect determination process. While storing (S161), the hold display is added to the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL or the second starting award memory display area 5HR based on the stored content (display mode at the time of addition) (S162).

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, when the first start condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the first prefetching notice buffer 194C or the second prefetching notice buffer 194D, and in the variable display, The effect control pattern is set based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the substrate 11.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a display operation example in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (d) of FIG. 29A (A) and (e) of FIG. 29B (A) show the scenes of the image display device 5 arranged in time series. The same applies to (a) to (d) of FIG. 29B and (e) of FIG. 29B (B). 29A and 29B, the arrow "↓" in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. 29A (A) and FIG. 29B (A) show the success effect of the second system change effect, and the active display change effect pattern CP3 shown in (B) of FIG. 27 as the effect mode of the active display change effect. (Change present (thickness "extremely thick")) is set. In addition, FIGS. 29A(B) and 29B(B) show a failure effect of the second system change effect, and as an effect mode of the active display change effect, the active display change effect pattern CP1 shown in FIG. 27(B). (No change (thickness "normal")) is set.

In FIG. 29A(A), (a) shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (active display obtained by moving a hold display corresponding to the variable display when the variable display is started to a predetermined active display area AHA, Alternatively, a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL. It is a scene. Here, the active display area AHA is provided, for example, in the lower center part of the image display device 5. At least the active display AH is displayed in the active display area AHA, and in addition to the active display AH, an active display frame AHW surrounding the active display AH and a predetermined range including the active display frame AHW are included. It is also possible to display characters and images in the active display area AHA such as inside or outside the active display AH itself or the active display frame AHW.

Just before the active display AH is displayed in the active display area AHA as shown in FIG. 29A(A) (a), the display is suspended in the buffer number "1" of the first look-ahead notice buffer 194C (active display AH). The display mode (display mode at the time of addition “white”) of the hold display (active display AH) determined at the time of winning the start prize of the hold display (active display AH) is stored as the effect content corresponding to In the buffer number “2” of the buffer 194C, the display mode of the hold display H1 (addition display mode “white”) determined at the time of the winning prize for the start of the hold display H1 is stored as the effect content corresponding to the hold display H1. In the buffer number “3” of the first look-ahead notice buffer 194C, the display mode of the hold display H2 determined at the time of starting winning of the hold display H2 as the effect contents corresponding to the hold display H2 (additional display mode “white”) ) Is stored in the buffer number “4” of the first pre-reading notice buffer 194C, and the display mode of the hold display H3 determined at the time of winning the start prize of the hold display H3 as the effect content corresponding to the hold display H3 (at the time of addition). It is assumed that the display mode “white”) has been stored.

In the scene of (a) of FIG. 29A (A), the variable display of the active information of the active display AH (the information corresponding to the hold information immediately before the active display AH is displayed as the active display AH in the active display area AHA) is started. When doing, the CPU 120 for effect control starts the variation of the decorative pattern based on the variation pattern “PA2-1 (non-reach (miss))” designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. After that, the fixed decorative design (“3”, “9”, “4”) is stopped and displayed. From the scene of (a) of FIG. 29A (A), when one game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 sets the first reserved memory number to “4”. To “” (S215). The CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category (S217), and the random number for determining the special figure display result is determined. The special figure display result is determined using the numerical value MR1 and the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (S403, S404).

For example, it is assumed that “miss” is determined as the special figure display result. The CPU 103 selects the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” from among the plurality of variation category determination tables (FIG. 17) based on the special figure display result “miss” and the number of pending storages “4” (FIG. 16). ), the variation category is determined based on the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” and the variation category determination random value MR3 (S412). For example, it is assumed that the variation category “PB5 (super reach β (big hit))” is determined. The CPU 103 sets the transmission of the variation category command designating the variation category “PB5” (S413), and executes the command control process (S17), whereby the variation category command designating the variation category “PB5” is sent to the main board 11 Is transmitted to the production control board 12.

The CPU 120 for effect control, which has received the variation category command or the like for designating the variation category from the main board 11, uses the variation display category to display the pending display mode among the plurality of pending display mode determination tables shown in FIG. The determination mode is selected, and the display mode of the hold display to be additionally displayed in the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL is based on the selected hold display mode determination table and the random value MR6 for determining the display mode of the hold display (when added). Display mode). The effect control CPU 120 determines the pending effect determination process in association with the buffer number of the first pre-reading notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number of the first start prize in the first start winning prize reception command buffer 194A. The content (display mode at the time of addition) is stored.

In the scene of FIG. 29A (A) (b), the effect control CPU 120 displays the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed in the first start winning prize memory display area in the active display area AHA, and displays the hold display. It is an example when the variable display of the active display AH corresponding to H1 is started. For example, in the scene of (b) of FIG. 29A (A), it is assumed that the active display AH is a change for executing the second system change effect. FIG. 29A(A)(c) shows a case where the second system change effect is executed immediately after the variable display is started in the scene of FIG. 29A(A)(B) (for example, timing 1 in FIG. 28). This is an example. In (c) of FIG. 29A (A), an arrow Y2 in which the character "intense heat" is drawn is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect. 29A(B) to 29A(B)(c) are the same as (a) to 29A(A)(c) in FIG. 29A(A). That is, the second system changes from (b) of FIG. 29A(A) to (c) of FIG. 29A(A) and from (b) of FIG. 29A(B) to (c) of FIG. 29A(B). It is a common effect that is commonly executed in the success effect and the failure effect in the effect.

Then, in the scene (d) of FIG. 29A, the arrow Y2, which is the second system change effect displayed in the scene (c) of FIG. 29A, moves toward the bottom of the image display device 5. Then, it is a scene where it collides with the active display frame AHW. In the scene (e) of FIG. 29B (A), after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW in the scene (d) of FIG. 29A, the line thickness of the active display frame AHW is “thick”. Has changed as a display mode. Then, in the scene of (e) of FIG. 29B (A), the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5L and the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5R are in the reach mode.

On the other hand, in the scene of (d) of FIG. 29A (B), the arrow Y2 that is the second system change effect displayed in the scene of (c) of FIG. 29A (B) moves toward the bottom of the image display device 5. Then, the scene is moving to the lower portion of the image display device 5 without colliding with the active display frame AHW. In the scene (e) of FIG. 29B (B), since the arrow Y2 disappears without colliding with the active display frame AHW in the scene (d) of FIG. 29A, the line thickness of the active display frame AHW is The display mode of "normal" remains unchanged. Then, in the scene (e) of FIG. 29B (B), the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display area 5L and the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display area 5R are in the reach mode.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a display operation example in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (d) of FIG. 30A (A) and (e) to (f) of FIG. 30B (A) are scenes of the image display device 5 arranged in time series. .. The same applies to (a) to (d) of FIG. 30(B) and (e) to (f) of FIG. 30B(B). 30A and 30B, the arrow "↓" in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. 30A (A) and FIG. 30B (A) show the success effect of the first system change effect, and as the effect mode of the active display change effect, the active display change effect pattern BP4 shown in (A) of FIG. 27. It is assumed that (changed (shape “star”)) is set. FIGS. 30A(B) and 30B(B) show a failure effect of the first system change effect, and as an effect mode of the active display change effect, the active display change effect pattern BP1 (change) shown in FIG. 27(A). It is assumed that nothing (shape “sphere”) is set.

FIG. 30A(A) (a) shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (active display obtained by moving a hold display corresponding to the variable display to a predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started, Alternatively, a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL. It is a scene.

In the scene of (a) of FIG. 30A, variable display of active information of the active display AH (information corresponding to the hold information immediately before the active display AH is displayed as the active display AH in the active display area AHA) is started. When doing, the CPU 120 for effect control starts the variation of the decorative pattern based on the variation pattern “PA2-1 (non-reach (miss))” designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. After that, the fixed decorative pattern (“3”, “9”, “4”) is in a state of being stopped and displayed.

In the scene of FIG. 30A (A) (b), the effect control CPU 120 displays the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed in the first start prize winning memory display area in the active display area AHA, and the hold display. It is an example when the variable display of the active display AH corresponding to H1 is started. For example, in the scene of (b) of FIG. 30A (A), it is assumed that the active display AH is a change for executing the first system change effect. The scene of FIG. 30A(A)(b) is an example when the first system change effect is executed immediately after the variable display is started (for example, timing 1 in FIG. 28). In FIG. 30A(B), three graphics (star Z1, triangle Z2, pentagon Z3) are displayed as a graphic group Y1 in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 as the first system change effect.

Then, in the scene of (c) of FIG. 30A, the graphic group Y1 which is the first system change effect displayed in the scene of (b) of FIG. 30A is directed toward the lower part of the image display device 5. In this scene, the triangle Z2 disappears while moving, and the star Z1 and the pentagon Z3 continue to move. In the scene of (d) of FIG. 30A (A), the graphic group Y1 which is the first system change effect is further moved to the lower part of the image display device 5 from the scene of (c) of FIG. In the star Z1 and the pentagon Z3 that form the group Y1, the pentagon Z3 disappears and only the star Z1 continues to move. 30A(B)(a) to 30A(B)(d) are also similar to FIG. 30A(A)(a) to 30A(A)(d). That is, (b) in FIG. 30A(A) to (d) in FIG. 30A(A) and (b) in FIG. 30A(B) to (d) in FIG. 30A(B) change the first system. It is a common effect that is commonly executed in the success effect and the failure effect in the effect.

Then, in the scene (e) of FIG. 30B (A), the star Z1 that remains without disappearing in the graphic group Y1 that is the first system change effect displayed in the scene (d) of FIG. 30A (A) is displayed. This is a scene in which the image display device 5 further moves toward the lower part and collides with the active display AH. In the scene of (f) of FIG. 30B (A), the active display AH in the scene of (e) of FIG. The display shape is changed to "star". Then, in the scene (f) of FIG. 30B (A), the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5L and the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5R are in the reach mode.

On the other hand, in the scene (e) of FIG. 30B (B), the star Z1 remaining without disappearing in the graphic group Y1 which is the first system change effect displayed in the scene (d) of FIG. 30A (B) is displayed. The scene further moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5, but disappears before colliding with the active display AH. In the scene (f) of FIG. 30B (B), the active star A1 in the scene (e) of FIG. 30B (B) disappears without colliding with the active group A1. The display shape of the display AH is displayed in the display mode as it is as “sphere”. Then, in the scene (f) of FIG. 30B (B), the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5L and the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5R are in the reach mode.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a display operation example in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (d) of FIG. 31A(A) and (e) to (g) of FIG. 31B(A) show scenes of the image display device 5 arranged in time series. .. The same applies to (a) to (d) of FIG. 31(B) and (e) to (g) of FIG. 31B(B). 31A and 31B, the arrow "↓" in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. 31A(A) and 31B(A) show success effects of the first system change effect and the second system change effect, and are shown in FIG. 27(C) as effect modes of the active display change effect. It is assumed that the active display change effect pattern AP12 (changed (thickness “extremely thick”), changed (shape “star”)) is set. FIGS. 31A(B) and 31B(B) show failure effects of the first system change effect and the second system change effect, and the active display shown in FIG. 27(C) as an effect mode of the active display change effect. It is assumed that the change effect pattern AP1 (no change (shape “sphere”), no change (thickness “normal”)) is set.

In FIG. 31A(A), (a) shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (active display obtained by moving a hold display corresponding to the variable display when the variable display is started to a predetermined active display area AHA, Alternatively, a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL. It is a scene.

In the scene of FIG. 31A(A)(a), variable display of active information of the active display AH (information corresponding to the hold information immediately before the active display AH is displayed as the active display AH in the active display area AHA) is started. When doing, the CPU 120 for effect control starts the variation of the decorative pattern based on the variation pattern “PA2-1 (non-reach (miss))” designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. After that, the fixed decorative pattern (“3”, “9”, “4”) is in a state of being stopped and displayed.

In the scene of FIG. 31A(A)(b), the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed in the first start prize winning memory display area is displayed in the active display area AHA, and the active display corresponding to the hold display H1 is displayed. It is an example when the variable display of AH is started.

In the scene of FIG. 31A(A)(b), the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed in the first start prize winning memory display area is displayed in the active display area AHA, and the active display corresponding to the hold display H1 is displayed. It is an example when the variable display of AH is started. For example, in the scene of (b) of FIG. 31A (A), it is assumed that the active display AH is a change for executing the second system change effect. 31A(A)(c) shows the first system change effect and the second system change effect immediately after the variable display is started in the scene of FIG. 31A(A)(b) (for example, timing 1 in FIG. 28). Is an example of when is executed. In FIG. 31A(C), three graphics (star Z1, triangle Z2, pentagon Z3) are displayed as a graphic group Y1 in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 as the first system change effect, and the second system change is performed. As an effect, an arrow Y2 in which the character "intense heat" is drawn is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5. 31A(B)(a) to 31A(B)(c) are the same as (a) to 31A(A)(c) in FIG. 31A(A). That is, the first system changes from (b) of FIG. 31A(A) to (c) of FIG. 31A(A) and from (b) of FIG. 31A(B) to (c) of FIG. 31A(B). It is a common effect that is commonly executed for the success effect and the failure effect in the effect and the second system change effect.

Then, in the scene (d) of FIG. 31A (A), the graphic group Y1 which is the first system change effect displayed in the scene (c) of FIG. 30A (A) is directed toward the lower part of the image display device 5. The triangle Z2 disappears while moving, and the star Z1 and the pentagon Z3 continue to move. In addition, a scene in which the arrow Y2, which is the second system change effect displayed in the scene of (c) of FIG. 31A (A), moves toward the bottom of the image display device 5 and collides with the active display frame AHW. Is. Then, in the scene of (e) of FIG. 31B (A), after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW in the scene of (d) of FIG. 31A (A), the line thickness of the active display frame AHW is “ The display mode of "extremely thick" has changed. Further, in the scene (e) of FIG. 31A (A), the graphic group Y1 which is the first system change effect is further moved toward the lower part of the image display device 5 from the scene (d) of FIG. 31A (A). Of the star Z1 and the pentagon Z3 that form the graphic group Y1, the pentagon Z3 disappears and only the star Z1 continues to move.

In the scene (f) of FIG. 31B (A), the star Z1 that remains without disappearing in the graphic group Y1 that is the first system change effect displayed in the scene (e) of FIG. 30A (A) is displayed. This is a scene in which the image display device 5 further moves toward the lower part and collides with the active display AH. In the scene (g) of FIG. 31B (A), after the star Z1 that remains without disappearing in the figure group Y1 collides with the active display AH in the scene (f) of FIG. 31B, the active display AH The display shape is changed to "star". Then, in the scene (g) of FIG. 30B (A), the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5L and the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5R are in the reach mode.

On the other hand, in the scene (d) of FIG. 31A (B), the arrow Y2 that is the second system change effect displayed in the scene (c) of FIG. 31A (B) moves toward the bottom of the image display device 5. Then, the scene is moving to the lower portion of the image display device 5 without colliding with the active display frame AHW. Further, in the scene (e) of FIG. 31A (B), the graphic group Y1 which is the first system change effect is further moved toward the lower part of the image display device 5 from the scene (d) of FIG. 31A (B). Of the star Z1 and the pentagon Z3 that form the graphic group Y1, the pentagon Z3 disappears and only the star Z1 continues to move. In the scene (f) of FIG. 31B (B), the star Z1 that remains without disappearing in the graphic group Y1 that is the first system change effect displayed in the scene (e) of FIG. 31A (B) is displayed. The scene further moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5, but disappears before colliding with the active display AH. In the scene of (g) of FIG. 31B (B), the active star A1 in the scene of (f) of FIG. 31B disappears without colliding with the active display AH. The display shape of the display AH is displayed in the display mode as it is as “sphere”. Further, in the scene (g) of FIG. 31B (B), the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display area 5L and the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display area 5R are in the reach mode.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a display operation example in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (d) of FIG. 32A (A) and (e) to (f) of FIG. 32B (A) are scenes of the image display device 5 arranged in time series. .. The same applies to (a) to (d) of FIG. 32(B) and (e) to (f) of FIG. 32B(B). 32A and 32B, the arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. 32A and 32B(A) show a success effect of the second system change effect, and as an effect mode of the active display change effect, the active display change effect pattern CP3 shown in FIG. 27(B). (Change present (thickness "extremely thick")) is set. 32A (B) and FIG. 32B (B) show a failure effect of the second system change effect, and as an effect mode of the active display change effect, the active display change effect pattern CP1 shown in (B) of FIG. 27. (No change (thickness "normal")) is set.

FIG. 32A(A) shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (active display obtained by moving a hold display corresponding to the variable display when the variable display is started to a predetermined active display area AHA, Alternatively, a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL. It is a scene.

Note that, just before the active display AH is displayed in the active display area AHA as shown in (a) of FIG. 32A, the pending display is made in the buffer number “1” of the first prefetching notice buffer 194C (active display AH). The display mode (display mode at the time of addition “white”) of the hold display (active display AH) determined at the time of starting winning of the hold display (active display AH) is stored as the effect content corresponding to the first prefetch notice. In the buffer number “2” of the buffer 194C, the display mode (display mode at the time of addition “white”) of the hold display H1 determined when the winning prize for the start of the hold display H1 is stored as the effect content corresponding to the hold display H1. In the buffer number “3” of the first look-ahead notice buffer 194C, the display mode of the hold display H2 (additional display mode “white”) determined at the time of winning of the starting prize of the hold display H2 as the effect content corresponding to the hold display H2. ) Is stored in the buffer number “4” of the first look-ahead notice buffer 194C as the effect contents corresponding to the hold display H3, and the display mode of the hold display H3 determined at the start winning of the hold display H3 (at the time of addition) It is assumed that the display mode “white”) has been stored.

In the scene of (a) of FIG. 32A, variable display of active information of the active display AH (information corresponding to the hold information immediately before the active display AH is displayed as the active display AH in the active display area AHA) is started. When doing, the CPU 120 for effect control starts the variation of the decorative pattern based on the variation pattern “PA2-1 (non-reach (miss))” designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. After that, the fixed decorative design (“3”, “9”, “4”) is stopped and displayed. From the scene of (a) of FIG. 32A (A), when one game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 sets the first reserved memory number to “4”. Is updated (S215). The CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category (S217), and the random number for determining the special figure display result is determined. The special figure display result is determined using the numerical value MR1 and the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (S403, S404).

For example, it is assumed that “miss” is determined as the special figure display result. The CPU 103 selects the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” from among the plurality of variation category determination tables (FIG. 17) based on the special figure display result “miss” and the number of pending storages “4” (FIG. 16). ), the variation category is determined based on the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” and the variation category determination random value MR3 (S412). For example, it is assumed that the variation category “PB5 (super reach β (big hit))” is determined. The CPU 103 sets the transmission of the variation category command designating the variation category “PB5” (S413), and executes the command control process (S17), whereby the variation category command designating the variation category “PB5” is sent to the main board 11 Is transmitted to the production control board 12.

The CPU 120 for effect control, which has received the variation category command or the like for designating the variation category from the main board 11, uses the variation display category to display the pending display mode among the plurality of pending display mode determination tables shown in FIG. The determination mode is selected, and the display mode of the hold display to be additionally displayed in the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL is based on the selected hold display mode determination table and the random value MR6 for determining the display mode of the hold display (when added). Display mode). The effect control CPU 120 determines the pending effect determination process in association with the buffer number of the first pre-reading notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number of the first start prize in the first start winning prize reception command buffer 194A. The content (display mode at the time of addition) is stored.

In the scene of (b) of FIG. 32A, the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed in the first start prize winning memory display area is displayed in the active display area AHA, and the active display corresponding to the hold display H1 is displayed. It is an example when the variable display of AH is started. For example, in the scene of (b) of FIG. 32A (A), it is assumed that the active display AH is a change for executing the second system change effect. 32A(A)(c) shows that reach is established after the variable display is started in the scene of FIG. 32A(B), and the decorative pattern and the decorative pattern display area 5R in the decorative pattern display area 5L are displayed. This is a scene in which the decorative pattern is in the reach mode. The scene of (d) of FIG. 32A is an example when the second system change effect is executed after the reach is established (for example, timing 3 of FIG. 28). In (d) of FIG. 32A (A), an arrow Y2 in which the character “intense heat” is drawn is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect. 32A(B) (a) to FIG. 32A(B) (d) are similar to FIG. 32A(A) (a) to FIG. 32A(A) (d). That is, (b) in FIG. 32A(A) to (d) in FIG. 32A(A) and (b) in FIG. 32A(B) to (d) in FIG. 32A(B) change the second system. It is a common effect that is commonly executed for the success effect and the failure effect in the effect.

Then, in the scene (e) of FIG. 32A (A), the arrow Y2 which is the second system change effect displayed in the scene (d) of FIG. 32A moves toward the bottom of the image display device 5. Then, it is a scene where it collides with the active display frame AHW. In the scene (f) of FIG. 32B (A), after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW in the scene (e) of FIG. 32A, the line thickness of the active display frame AHW is “thick”. Has changed as a display mode.

On the other hand, in the scene (e) of FIG. 32A (B), the arrow Y2 which is the second system change effect displayed in the scene (d) of FIG. 32A moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. Then, the scene is moving to the lower portion of the image display device 5 without colliding with the active display frame AHW. In the scene (f) of FIG. 32B (B), since the arrow Y2 disappears without colliding with the active display frame AHW in the scene (e) of FIG. 32A, the line thickness of the active display frame AHW is The display mode of "normal" remains unchanged. Similarly, for the second system change effect, the active display change effect may be executed after the reach is established. Similarly, for the first system change effect and the second system change effect, the active display change effect may be executed after the reach is established.

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a display operation example in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (f) of FIG. 33A and (g) to (h) of FIG. 33B show the scenes of the image display device 5 arranged in time series. 33A and 33B, the arrow "↓" in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. 33A and 33B show a success effect of the second system change effect, and as an effect mode of the active display change effect, the active display change effect pattern CP3 (changed (thickness) is shown in FIG. 27B). "Thick")) is set. Here, the display operation examples shown in FIGS. 33A and 33B are different from the display operation examples shown in FIGS. 29A and 29B in that they are pseudo continuous fluctuations. Other than that, it is the same, so the description will focus on the different parts. Further, the description of the failure effect is omitted.

FIG. 33A(a) shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (active display obtained by moving a hold display corresponding to the variable display when starting the variable display to a predetermined active display area AHA, or A special image showing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display) is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL. ..

In FIG. 33A (c), the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display area 5L and the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display area 5R after the variable display is started in the scene of (A) (b) of FIG. 32A is the reach mode. It is a scene in which the display is stopped in a different display mode. In the scene of (d) of FIG. 33A, the chance symbol described as “opportunity” in the decorative symbol display area 5C appears on the image display device 5 by slow scrolling, and in the scene of (e) of FIG. 33A, the chance symbol is the decorative symbol. Temporarily stop in the display area 5C. Then, in the scene of (f) of FIG. 33A, all the temporarily stopped decorative designs are variably displayed (revariable display) again.

In (g) of FIG. 33B, an arrow Y2 in which the character “intense heat” is drawn is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect. FIG. 33A (a) to FIG. 33B (g) are common effects that are commonly executed in the success effect and the failure effect in the second system change effect.

Then, in the scene of (h) of FIG. 33B, the arrow Y2 that is the second system change effect displayed in the scene of FIG. 33B (g) moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5, and the active display frame AHW is displayed. It is a scene that is colliding with. In the scene of (i) of FIG. 33B, after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW in the scene of (h) of FIG. 33B, the line thickness of the active display frame AHW is changed to the display mode of “thick” ing. In addition, after the line thickness of the active display frame AHW has changed to the display mode of "extremely thick", the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display area 5L and the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display area 5R are in the reach mode.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a display operation example in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (f) of FIG. 34A and (g) to (j) of FIG. 34B show the scenes in the image display device 5 arranged in time series. 34A and 34B, the arrow "↓" in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. 34A and 34B show the success effect of the second system change effect, and as the effect mode of the active display change effect, the active display change effect pattern CP3 shown in FIG. "Thick")) is set. Here, the display operation examples shown in FIGS. 34A and 34B are different from the display operation examples shown in FIGS. 29A and 29B in that they are pseudo continuous fluctuations. Other than that, it is the same, so the description will focus on the different parts. Further, the description of the failure effect is omitted.

FIG. 34A(a) shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (active display obtained by moving a hold display corresponding to the variable display to a predetermined active display area AHA when starting the variable display, or A special image showing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display) is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL. ..

In FIG. 34A (c), the reach is established after the variable display is started in the scene of FIG. 34A (b), and the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display area 5L and the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display area 5R reach. It is a scene that is stopped and displayed in a mode. In the scene of (d) of FIG. 34A, the chance symbol described as “opportunity” in the decorative symbol display area 5C appears on the image display device 5 by slow scrolling, and in the scene of (e) of FIG. 34A, the chance symbol is the decorative symbol. Temporarily stop in the display area 5C. Then, in the scene of (f) of FIG. 34A, all the temporarily stopped decorative patterns are variably displayed (revariable display) again.

In addition, in (f) of FIG. 34A, an arrow Y2 in which the character “intense heat” is drawn is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect. Here, (a) of FIG. 34A to (f) of FIG. 34A are common effects that are commonly executed by the success effect and the failure effect in the second system change effect.

Then, in the scene (g) of FIG. 34B, the arrow Y2, which is the second system change effect displayed during the re-variable display in the scene of FIG. 34B (f), moves toward the bottom of the image display device 5. , A scene in which the active display frame AHW collides. In the scene of (h) of FIG. 34B, after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW in the scene of (g) of FIG. 34B, the line thickness of the active display frame AHW changes as a display mode of “extremely thick”. The decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display area 5L and the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display area 5R are in a reach mode. Then, in the scene of (i) of FIG. 34B, after the line thickness of the active display frame AHW is changed to the display mode of "extremely thick", the decorative pattern of the decorative pattern display area 5L and the decorative pattern of the decorative pattern display area 5R In the reach mode, a chance symbol is displayed on the image display device 5, and in the scene of (j) of FIG. 34B, the chance symbol is displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5C without being temporarily stopped and the decorative symbol is displayed. The decorative pattern in the area 5L and the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display area 5R are determined as the reach mode.

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a display operation example in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (f) in FIG. 35A and (g) to (i) in FIG. 35B are the time series of the respective scenes in the image display device 5. 35A and 35B, the arrow "↓" in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative pattern is changing. 35A and 35B show a success effect of the second system change effect, and as an effect mode of the active display change effect, the active display change effect pattern CP3 shown in FIG. 27B (change present (thickness) "Thick")) is set. Here, the reach operation timing differs between the display operation example shown in FIGS. 35A and 35B and the display operation example shown in FIGS. 34A and 34B. Other than that, it is the same, so the description will focus on the different parts. Further, the description of the failure effect is omitted.

FIG. 35A(a) shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (active display obtained by moving a hold display corresponding to the variable display to a predetermined active display area AHA when starting the variable display, or A special image showing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display) is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL. ..

In FIG. 35A (c), the arrow Y2 in which the character “intense heat” is drawn in the upper left part of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect after the variable display is started in the scene of FIG. 35A (b) Is displayed. Here, (a) in FIG. 35A to (c) in FIG. 35A are common effects that are commonly executed in the success effect and the failure effect in the second system change effect. Then, in the scene (d) of FIG. 35A, the arrow Y2 that is the second system change effect displayed during the re-variable display in the scene of FIG. 35B (c) moves toward the bottom of the image display device 5. , A scene in which the active display frame AHW collides. Then, in the scene of (e) of FIG. 35A, after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW, the line thickness of the active display frame AHW changes as a display mode of "extremely thick", and the decorative symbol display area 5L It is a scene in which the decorative design and the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5R are stopped and displayed in a display mode different from the reach mode.

In the scene of (f) of FIG. 35A, the chance symbol described as “opportunity” in the decorative symbol display area 5C appears on the image display device 5 by slow scrolling, and in the scene of (g) of FIG. 35B, the chance symbol is the decorative symbol. Temporarily stop in the display area 5C. Then, in the scene of (h) of FIG. 35B, all the temporarily stopped decorative designs are variably displayed (revariable display) again. Then, in the scene of (i) of FIG. 35B, the pseudo continuous variation ends, and the decorative design of the decorative design display area 5L and the decorative design of the decorative design display area 5R are displayed in the reach mode.

FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a display operation example in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (f) of FIG. 36A and (g) to (i) of FIG. 36B show the scenes of the image display device 5 arranged in time series. 36A and 36B, the arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. Further, FIGS. 36A and 36B show a success effect of the second system change effect, and as an effect mode of the active display change effect, the active display change effect pattern CP3 shown in FIG. "Thick")) is set. Here, the reach operation timing differs between the display operation example shown in FIGS. 35A and 35B and the display operation example shown in FIGS. 35A and 35B. Other than that, it is the same, so the description will focus on the different parts. Further, the description of the failure effect is omitted.

FIG. 36A(a) shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (active display obtained by moving a hold display corresponding to the variable display to a predetermined active display area AHA when starting the variable display, or A special image showing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display) is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL. ..

In FIG. 36A (c), the arrow Y2 in which the character “intense heat” is drawn in the upper left portion of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect after the variable display is started in the scene of FIG. 36A (b) Is displayed. Here, (a) in FIG. 35A to (c) in FIG. 35A are common effects that are commonly executed in the success effect and the failure effect in the second system change effect. Then, in the scene of (d) of FIG. 36A, the arrow Y2, which is the second system change effect displayed during the re-variable display in the scene of FIG. 35B (c), moves toward the bottom of the image display device 5. , A scene in which the active display frame AHW collides. Then, in the scene of (e) of FIG. 36A, after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW, the line thickness of the active display frame AHW changes as a display mode of "extremely thick", and the decorative symbol display area 5L is displayed. It is a scene in which the decorative design and the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5R are stopped and displayed in the reach mode.

In the scene of (f) of FIG. 36A, the chance symbol described as “opportunity” in the decorative symbol display area 5C appears on the image display device 5 by slow scrolling, and in the scene of (g) of FIG. 36B, the chance symbol is the decorative symbol. Temporarily stop in the display area 5C. Then, in the scene of (h) of FIG. 36B, all the temporarily stopped decorative patterns are variably displayed (revariable display) again. Then, in the scene of (i) of FIG. 36B, the pseudo continuous variation ends, and the decorative design of the decorative design display area 5L and the decorative design of the decorative design display area 5R are displayed in the reach mode.

Here, in FIGS. 36A and 36B, an example of a scene in which the decorative design of the decorative design display area 5L and the decorative design of the decorative design display area 5R are displayed in the reach mode is as shown in FIGS. 36A(e) and 36B(i). However, as shown in FIGS. 36A and 36B, when the pseudo continuous fluctuation occurs after the reach is established, “timing 3” in FIG. 28 is treated as the timing in FIG. 36B(i). That is, the reach establishment in FIGS. 36A and 36B means that the pseudo-continuous variation ends and the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5L and the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5R are displayed in the reach mode (in FIG. 36B). i) is the scene.

29 to 36, the success effect may be executed at the timing at which the active display change effect (first system change effect, second system change effect, first system change effect, and second system change effect) is executed. When the degree of expectation is different and, for example, there is an active display change effect executed at the first timing and an active display change effect executed at the second timing later than the first timing in the change, the change is executed at the second timing. This indicates that there is a high expectation that a successful effect in the active display change effect will be executed.

(Modification) Note that the display mode of the hold display does not have to be the display mode showing the expectation degree for the big hit shown in FIG. May include different special aspects, and first special aspect and second special aspect which are different aspects from the normal aspect and the special aspect. This will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 37, 38 and 39.

For example, instead of the determination rate of the display mode of the hold display shown in FIG. 24, another setting example of the determination rate of the display mode of the hold display shown in FIG. 37 may be used. FIG. 37 is a diagram illustrating another example of setting the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display. Note that the ROM 121 may store seven types of hold display mode determination tables according to the variation category. FIG. 37(A) shows the pending display mode selected when the variation category is “PA1 (shortening/non-reach loss)” or the variation category “PA2 (non-reach (loss))” among the seven types described above. It is a setting example (H-TBL1) of the determination rate of the display mode of the hold display by the determination table. FIG. 37(B) is a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA3 (normal reach (miss))” among the seven types described above ( H-TBL 2). FIG. 37C shows the setting of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA4 (super reach α (miss))” among the above-mentioned seven types. It is an example (H-TBL3).

FIG. 37D is a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display according to the hold display form determination table selected when the variation category is “PA5 (super reach β (miss)” among the seven types described above. 37(E) is a display of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PB3 (normal reach (big hit))” among the above seven types. Fig. 37(F) is an example of setting the determination rate of the mode (H-TBL5), which is selected when the variation category is "PB4 (super reach α (big hit))" among the seven types described above. Fig. 37(G) is a setting example (H-TBL6) of the determination rate of the display mode of the hold display by the display mode determination table, and the variation category "PB5 (super reach β (big hit)) among the above seven types. Is a setting example (H-TBL7) of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display according to the hold display mode determination table selected when "".

Comparing FIG. 37 with FIG. 24, it is different in that a part of the determination ratio for “white” in each of the pending display mode determination tables in FIG. 24 is assigned to “gray” in FIG. 37. Specifically, the determination ratio for "white" in each of the pending display mode determination tables is 4:1 for the "white" and "gray" determination ratios for each of the pending display mode determination tables of FIG. This is a setting example in which the determined ratio is assigned as described above. In this setting example, “white” is a display mode (normal mode) of normal hold display, and “gray” is a special mode different from the normal mode. The special mode has the same degree of expectation for the big hit as the normal mode, but when the "gray" hold display becomes the active display, the percentage of executing the active display change effect that changes the display mode of the active display is It is a display mode indicating that it is high.

In the setting example, unlike the normal mode and the special mode, the expectation level for the big hit is different (for example, the expectation degree for the big hit is higher than the normal mode and the special mode), which is the first special mode, and the normal mode and Unlike the special mode, the expectation for the big hit is different (for example, the expectation for the big hit is higher than that of the first special mode), which is the second special mode, or the expectation for the big hit, unlike the normal mode and the special mode. The third special mode such as red or the like may be included, which is different (for example, the expectation for a big hit is higher than the second special mode).

For example, in the first hold effect determination process (S160), the effect control CPU 120 determines a plurality of hold display modes shown in FIG. 37 based on the change category specified by the change category command transmitted from the main board 11. The hold display mode determination table to be used is selected from the tables, and based on the selected hold display mode determination table and the random value MR6 for determining the display mode of the hold display, additional display is performed in the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL. The display mode (display mode at the time of addition) of the hold display to be performed may be determined.

After executing the first hold effect determination process (S160), the effect control CPU 120 stores the determination content of the first hold effect determination process based on the determination result of the first hold effect determination process (S161). .. Specifically, for example, the effect control CPU 120 changes the display mode of the hold display in the first hold effect determination process to the first start prize-winning reception command buffer 194A corresponding to the buffer number of the first start prize. The determination content (display mode at the time of addition) of the first holding effect determination processing is stored in association with the buffer number of the prefetching announcement buffer 194C.

After executing the process of S161, the effect control CPU 120 displays the hold display determined in the first hold effect determination process (S160) (the first start prize in the first start winning combination reception command buffer 194A). Based on the display mode at the time of addition stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetching notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number of No. 1), a new hold display is added to the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL. Suspension addition processing is executed (S162). More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first start winning award storage display area 5HL to display a hold display in the additional display mode stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetching notice buffer 194C described above. By setting the control pattern as the usage pattern and transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, the first hold effect The hold display according to the display mode at the time of addition determined in the determination processing is added to the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL.

Then, in the process of S532 in the effect execution setting process of FIG. 25, the process of determining whether or not to execute the active display change effect for the active display corresponding to the variation, or which active when changing the active display change effect is executed. A process for determining whether to execute the display change effect, and in the case of active display (variation) for executing the active display change effect, a process for determining the effect mode of the active display change effect to be executed and the active in the change. A process of determining the timing of executing the display change effect, a process of setting (or resetting) the effect control pattern based on the selection result of the active display change effect, and the like are executed.

Here, the effect execution setting process (S532) will be described in detail. First, a process of determining whether to execute an active display change effect for an active display corresponding to the variation, and a process of determining which active display change effect to execute when executing the active display change effect will be described. To do. When using the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display shown in FIG. 37, the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table shown in FIG. 38 may be used instead of the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table shown in FIG. .. Here, the example of setting the determination rate by the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table shown in FIG. 26 and the example of the determination rate by the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table shown in FIG. The difference is that the setting example of the determination rate by another active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table is referred to depending on whether the display mode of the display is the special mode.

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing another example of setting the determination rate based on the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table. Specifically, FIG. 38(A) is a setting example of the determination rate by the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table that is referred to when the display mode of the active display corresponding to the variation is not the special mode (gray). FIG. 38(B) is an example of setting the determination rate by the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table that is referred to when the display mode of the active display corresponding to the variation is the special mode (gray). Each of the setting examples shown in FIGS. 38(A) and 38(B) is similar to the setting example shown in FIG. 26, whether or not to execute the active display change effect, and when executing the active display change effect. It is an example of setting the determination rate of the effect mode of the active display change effect. 38A and 38B, the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table is compared with a random number value MR7 (not shown) for determining the active display change effect execution presence/absence. Numerical values (determined values) are assigned to “executed” and “not executed” at determined rates as shown in FIGS. 38(A) and 38(B), respectively. In addition, in the “execution” of the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR7 (not shown) for determining the active display change effect execution presence/absence is “first system”. 38A and FIG. 38B respectively for the "change effect", the "second system change effect", and the "first system change effect and the second system change effect". Allocated in percentage.

It should be noted that "execution available" and "first system change effect" indicate that the first system change effect is performed as an active display change effect, and "execution enabled" and "second system change effect" indicate the second system change effect. This means that it is performed as an active display change effect, and “execution performed”, “first system change effect and second system change effect” means that both the first system change effect and the second system change effect are changed by active display. Indicates that the performance will be performed. Further, "no execution" represents that the active display change effect is not performed. Further, the fluctuation pattern 1-X represents the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 shown in FIG. 5, and the fluctuation pattern PA2-X represents any of the fluctuation patterns PA2-1, PA2-2, PA2-3 shown in FIG. , The fluctuation pattern PA3-X represents one of the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 shown in FIG. 5, and the fluctuation pattern PA4 represents the fluctuation patterns PA4-1, PA4-2, PA4-3 shown in FIG. Indicates any one of PA4-4. The same applies to the fluctuation patterns PA5-X, PB4-X, PB5-X.

According to FIG. 38, when the variation pattern (variable display pattern) of the variation (variable display) designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation patterns PA1-X and PA2-X, "no execution" is 100. %, which means that none of the first system change effect, the second system change effect, the first system change effect, and the second system change effect is executed. Further, when the active display change effect is executed (in the case of “execution performed” in FIG. 38(A) and FIG. 38(B)), when the hot reach (eg, super reach) is reached, the reach that is not hot (eg, normal reach ), the rate at which the first system change effect is executed is higher than that in the second system change effect. Further, when the variation pattern is "big hit", the ratio of the first system change effect to be executed is higher than that to the second system change effect, compared to the case of "loss". Further, when the hot reach (for example, super reach) is performed, the ratio of execution of both the first system change effect and the second system change effect is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach). Further, when the variation pattern is "big hit", the proportion of execution of both the first system change effect and the second system change effect is higher than when "various".

Further, depending on whether or not the active display corresponding to the change is the special mode, the determination rate of whether or not the active display change effect is executed is different, and when the active display corresponding to the change is the special mode, the change The determination rate of the active display change effect being executed is higher than that in the case where the active display corresponding to is not a special mode. Further, a case where the special mode as shown in FIG. 26 is not considered, a case where the special mode as shown in FIG. 38A is considered and the active display corresponding to the variation is not the special mode, and FIG. When the active display corresponding to the change is a special mode in consideration of the special mode as shown in FIG. 23 and the respective cases are compared, the determination rate by the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table shown in FIG. , The determination rate according to the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table shown in FIG. 26, and the determination rate according to the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table shown in FIG.

That is, in the effect execution setting process (S532), the effect control CPU 120 specifies the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table, the random value MR7 for determining whether the active display change effect execution is performed, and the variation pattern designation command. Whether to execute the active display change effect according to the change pattern (variable display pattern) of the change (variable display). , Which active display change effect is to be executed is determined.

It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the active display change effect, and when it is determined to “execute”, “first system change effect”, “second system change effect”, or “first system change effect”. And "second system change effect" may be determined.

It should be noted that the graphic group Y1 displayed as the first system change effect may be determined such that the degree of expectation for a big hit changes depending on the combination of the graphics that form the graphic group Y1. This will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of setting the determination rate by the first system detailed pattern determination table when executing the first system change effect. In each setting example shown in FIG. 39, the first system detailed pattern determination table of the first system change effect includes, for example, ten types of first system detailed patterns SHP1 corresponding to combinations of three figures of a triangle, a pentagon, and a star. ~ SHP10 is included. This first system detailed pattern is the case where only the first system change effect is executed (when it is determined to be one of the active display change effect patterns BP1 to BP4 in FIG. 27A), and the first system change effect. It is referred to when both the second system change effect is executed (when any one of the active display change effect patterns AP1 to AP12 in FIG. 27C is determined).

In the first system detailed pattern, the numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR8 (not shown) for determining the first system detailed pattern is determined by the active display change effect pattern at a determination rate as shown in FIG. It is assigned.

It is assumed that the ROM 121 stores the first system detailed patterns as the effect modes of the 10 types of first system change effects corresponding to the 16 types of active display change effect patterns shown in FIG.

In FIG. 39, the first system detailed pattern “SHP1” is an effect pattern when all the three figures forming the figure group Y1 are formed of triangles. According to the illustrated example, AP1 to AP3 and BP1 have a high decision rate determined when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach) in FIG. 27, and when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach), The determination rate determined by the first system detailed pattern SHP1 is higher than when hot reach (for example, super reach) is performed. Further, the active display change effect pattern determined in FIG. 27 determines the display mode of the active display corresponding to the fluctuation, and the first system detail that can be the display mode of the active display corresponding to the determined fluctuation. The pattern is determined.

Similarly, the first system detailed pattern “SHP2” is an effect pattern when the three figures forming the figure group Y1 are pentagons, triangles, and triangles, and the first system detailed pattern “SHP3” is a figure. The three patterns forming the group Y1 are effect patterns when the patterns are pentagons, pentagons, and triangles. In the first system detailed pattern "SHP4," the three patterns forming the figure group Y1 are pentagons, pentagons, and pentagons. The first system detailed pattern "SHP5" is a production pattern when the three figures forming the figure group Y1 are composed of stars, triangles, and triangles. The detailed pattern "SHP6" is an effect pattern when the three figures forming the figure group Y1 are formed of stars, pentagons, and triangles, and the first system detailed pattern "SHP7" forms the figure group Y1. When the three figures are stars, pentagons, and pentagons, it is an effect pattern, and in the first system detailed pattern "SHP8", the three figures that make up the figure group Y1 are stars, stars, triangles, and triangles. The first system detailed pattern "SHP9" is an effect pattern when three figures forming the figure group Y1 are composed of stars, stars, and pentagons, and the first system detailed pattern "SHP10". "Is an effect pattern when all of the three figures forming the figure group Y1 are formed of stars. According to the illustrated example, the degree of expectation that the success effect can be executed differs depending on the combination of the graphics forming the graphic group Y1.

In the case of considering the special mode as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, when the active display change effect is executed for the active display corresponding to the hold display displayed in the special mode, the above-described common effect is generated. , A suggestive effect that suggests a success effect and a failure effect, and a suggestive effect that suggests an active display change effect for an active display corresponding to a hold display displayed in a special mode (for example, a success effect and a failure effect). The suggestive effect suggesting the common effect that is commonly executed in and may be executed in the same or different manners. In the case of considering the special mode as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the active display change effect for the active display has been described. However, the display mode of the hold display displayed in the starting winning prize memory display area 5H is the special mode. In some cases, the hold change effect executed in the same or different effect mode as the active display change effect may be performed on the hold display displayed in the special mode.

Note that, in FIG. 39, in the figure group Y1 configured by the initial display (combination), the figure to be deleted in the common effect may be deleted from the figure having the display mode of the active display with low expectation. For example, when the first system detailed pattern SHP6 is determined as the success effect, the display mode after the success effect is executed in the figure group including the three figures of “star”, “pentagon”, and “triangle” Of the two other than the figure (eg, “pentagon”), the figure with low expectations (eg, “triangle”) is deleted first, and the figure with low expectations (eg, “star”) is deleted next. If it is a failure effect, delete “triangle”, “pentagon”, and “star” from the figure group consisting of three figures of “star”, “pentagon”, and “triangle” in this order. Good.

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing the relationship between changes in the hold display and active display. In particular, FIG. 40 shows an effect example corresponding to “when red or blue character change is selected as the fourth hold display” shown in FIG. 26(B).

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the mode of the hold display is a character, a red or blue character in which any one of the characters A to D is drawn on the face appears as the hold display. .. Which color of character appears is determined by a random number (MR6) lottery as already described with reference to FIG. Further, which character appears will depend on how many pending displays already exist (see FIG. 26B), as already described. After that, when the hold display shifts as the hold storage is exhausted, the character may change. Whether or not the character has changed is determined by a random number (MR6) lottery together with the character color, as already described with reference to FIG. When it is determined that there is a change in the character, the character changes each time the hold display shifts, as shown in FIG.

In the present embodiment, the character changes so as to face the first character "A" that appears in the alphabet (D character→C character→B character→A character). As shown in FIG. 26(B), when the hold display is shifted and corresponds to the “first hold display”, the type of the character when the new hold display is performed is changed to the character A just. It is set (for example, the D character for the fourth hold display). Further, when the variable display is started based on the pending display of the characters, all the characters that have changed so far are displayed in the active display area.

An example of such an effect pattern (“when red or blue character change is selected as the fourth hold display”) will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 shows a state in which the reserved memories in the first starting prize winning memory display area 5HL are consumed one by one in the order of (A) to (E). In this example, it is assumed that new pending storage does not occur between (A) to (E).

In this example, the description will be made with a focus on how the hold display changes when the character-type hold display is displayed, and what kind of active display is performed corresponding to the hold display. To do. For this reason, the active display area AHA from the start of the hold display of the character form to the start of the active display based on it is blank. However, in reality, various active displays may be performed in the active display area AHA each time the pending display is consumed.

FIG. 40(A) shows a case where the character 6 appears as a new fourth hold display in a state where three hold displays already exist in the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL. Since it is the fourth hold display, the D character appears as the character 6. The color of the character is either red or blue, but in this example, it will be described as red. As shown in FIG. 24, red has a higher jackpot expectation degree than blue, and also has a higher rate of character change when the hold display is shifted. Also, the expectation of a big hit is higher when the character changes than when the character does not change. Therefore, the player has an expectation for a big hit and an expectation for a character change.

FIG. 40(B) shows a state where one reserved memory has been exhausted and the reserved display of the character 6 has been shifted right by one. At this time, the pending display shifted from the fourth position to the third position changes from character D to character C. The color does not change. Since the character has changed, the player has more expectation for a big hit.

FIG. 40(C) shows a state in which one reserved memory is exhausted and the reserved display of character 6 is further shifted to the right by one. At this time, the hold display shifted from the third position to the second position changes from the C character to the B character. The color does not change. Players continue to expect big hits.

In FIG. 40(D), one reserved memory is further consumed, the reserved display of the character 6 is further shifted to the right by one, and the reserved display of the character 6 is used at the next variable display position (first position). Position). The hold display shifted from the second position to the first position changes from the B character to the A character. The color does not change. Players continue to expect big hits.

It should be noted that at the stage of FIG. 40(D), a pattern that does not change the character 6 may be provided. Further, when the character 6 changes, the expectation that the pending display is a big hit may be higher than when the character 6 does not change. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a feeling of excitement as to whether or not the B character changes to the A character even at this stage. In addition, as an effect that fuels whether or not the character changes to the A character, the A character may be displayed after the B character and the A character are alternately displayed for a certain period. The effects as these modified examples may be executed at the stage of FIG. 40(B) or FIG. 40(C), or any stage (or all stages of FIG. 40(B) to (D)). ) May be executed.

FIG. 40(E) shows a state in which one hold memory is further consumed and a change based on the hold display of the character is started. In this state, all the A characters to D characters that have appeared so far due to the change in the hold display are displayed in the active display area AHA. Moreover, as shown in the figure, the characters are arranged from the right in the order of appearance of the characters (characters that appear later are arranged to the left).

By confirming the active display, the player can easily confirm (understand) what kind of process the variable display currently in progress is based on the pending display. For this reason, the player does not need to remember the change mode each time the character changes. In the case of FIG. 40, since it is a red character and the character has changed, the player can enjoy the variable display while holding great expectations for the big hit.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing changes in the active display before and after the development to the super reach effect. 41 will be described as a continuation of the variation display of FIG. In particular, FIG. 41 shows a case where the fluctuation shown in FIG. 40(E) continues and eventually the fluctuation display develops into super reach. The player has great expectations for the big hit by displaying the characters A to D in the active display area AHA. Moreover, after that, when the variation display progresses from the state of “before the super reach has been developed” shown in FIG. 41(A) to the state of “when the super reach has been developed” as shown in FIG. 41(B) so as to meet the expectation, The player's interest shifts from the active display area AHA to the variable display of the symbol itself. In this case, rather than displaying the active display area AHA, which is of low interest to the player, as it is, it is more effective to make the variable display conspicuous on the screen.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 41(B), when the super reach effect is developed, only a part of the active display area AHA is displayed on the screen so that the variable display is conspicuous. Thereby, the player's attention can be further focused on the variable display. However, even if only a part of the active display is displayed, it is desirable that the type of the character can be specified by looking into the face of the character as shown in the figure.

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing another example of changes in the active display before and after the development into the super reach effect. 42 is a modification of FIG. 41. In FIG. 41, only a part of the active display area AHA is displayed on the screen when the super reach effect is developed. However, by reducing the active display area AHA as shown in FIG. The same effect as in the case of 41 can be obtained. Even in this case, it is desirable to reduce the size so that each character can be identified. Further, in the example of FIG. 42, in order to make the variable display conspicuous by reducing the active display area AHA to the extent that each character can be specified as much as possible, the active display area AHA is set to display each character. Only the area around the face is displayed. Although the active display area AHA is displayed in a reduced size, the size of the face portion of the character displayed therein may not be changed.

The effects shown in FIGS. 41 and 42 are not limited to those before the development to the super reach effect, and are attracting the attention of the player such as long reach effect, full rotation reach effect, and jackpot notice effect. It may be performed when a desired specific effect is executed.

Next, various modifications regarding the holding stage effect and the active display, which have been described so far by taking the character (humanoid character) as an example, will be listed.

(Variations of holding stage effect and active display)
(A) The active display change effect (success effect) and the active display change goose effect (failure effect) as described with reference to FIGS. Display) may be applied. Specifically, after the active display of the humanoid character as shown in FIG. 40(E) is started, in the first system change effect as described above, the effect until the graphic group Y1 collides with the active display. Alternatively, in the second system change effect, the effect until the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame surrounding the active display is executed.

After that, the success effect or the failure effect is executed. As a success effect, in the first system change effect, an effect in which a figure of one of the shapes “star” of the figure group Y1 collides with the active display and changes to “a display mode in which each character wears a star crown”, In the second system change effect, an effect in which the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame and the line thickness of the active display frame changes, and both the first system change effect and the second system change effect are executed and active. An effect or the like for changing the display or display mode of the active display frame or the like is executed.

On the other hand, as the failure effect, in the first system change effect, an effect that disappears before any figure of the shape “star” of the figure group Y1 collides with the active display and the display mode of the active display does not change, In the system change effect, the arrow Y2 disappears before the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame, and the line thickness of the active display frame is not changed, both the first system change effect and the second system change effect. Execution is performed to execute an effect that does not change the display mode of one or both of the active display and the active display frame.

That is, a common effect (common effect) is executed when the active display mode is changed and when it is not changed. In this case, as described above, the ratio of executing the success effect is controlled to be different depending on which timing of the plurality of timings during execution of the variable display, which is to execute the common effect.

In this way, when the active display change effect (success effect) as described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 36B is executed after the active display displayed through the above-mentioned hold step effect is executed, the hold step The expectation for a big hit may be set higher than when such an active display change effect is not executed after the active display displayed through the effect is executed.

(B) As an effect mode in which a plurality of humanoid characters are displayed in the active display area AHA, not all characters are displayed at the same time as in FIG. It may be switched and displayed in order for each time. For example, when a character appears from the left, moves to the right, and disappears, it is possible to repeat the display in which the next character appears from the left. Alternatively, the A character, the B character, the C character, and the D character rotate around in a loop while holding their hands, and the character that comes to the front position as seen from the player is larger than the character on the back side. The display may be visible. In the active display area AHA, a plurality of groups, for example, a first group of A characters and B characters and a second group of C characters and D characters are switched and displayed at regular time intervals. You may make it display a character for every.

(C) The type of character does not have to be a human type. It may be an animal or other character. Alternatively, the character may be the alphabet itself (only the alphabet).

(D) The active display area AHA does not have to display the entire character used for the hold display. For example, as shown in FIG. 41, at least only the portion where the character can be identified may be displayed.

(E) The holding stage effect as shown in FIG. 40 may be executed on condition that the number of holding pieces is a predetermined number or more. For example, so-called stop hitting by the player may be prevented, assuming that the holding stage effect is executed on condition that the number of held pieces is four or more. Alternatively, the holding stage effect may be executed on condition that the total number of the first holding memory and the second holding memory is equal to or more than a predetermined number.

(F) In the example of FIG. 26B, when the hold display changes, the character A always changes. However, for example, it may be changed in the order of D character→C character→B character, but may not be changed further. Explaining with reference to FIG. 26B, for example, the “third hold” for “when the red or blue character change is selected as the third hold display” is “D character”, and the “two hold” is set. The "eye" is defined as "C character", and the "first reserved" is defined as "B character".

(G) The reserved display character and the active display character do not have to be completely the same characters, but may be characters that are related to each other. For example, the character in the hold display possesses the sword that fits in the sheath, while the character in the active display holds the sword out of the sheath, so that the player can easily understand that the active display is the active display. Good. Alternatively, a humanoid character may be used in the hold display, while a character different from the humanoid character may be used in the active display (for example, only alphabets according to the present embodiment). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from confusing the pending display and the active display by using the humanoid character in the pending display and using the humanoid character in the active display.

(H) In “when red or blue character change is selected as the first hold display” in FIG. 26B, the hold is started from the first hold, so that the hold does not change substantially. However, the character B may be temporarily displayed as the B character or another character (first display), and then the character may be changed to another character before the variable display based on the reserved display is started. As described above, the point that the mode is changed before the hold display is shifted is not limited to the first hold display. For example, even when the hold display is started with the fourth hold, the hold display mode may be changed immediately before shifting to the third hold. That is, the timing of changing the mode of the hold display is not limited to the timing of shifting the hold display. For example, after the hold display is shifted, the active display change effect (success effect) and the active display change goose effect (failure effect) as described in FIGS. 27 to 36B are changed to the hold display change effect (success effect) and the hold display change, respectively. It may be executed as a gust production (failure production) on the hold display, and the mode of the hold display may be changed through the hold display change production (success production). Then, the active display may be performed so that the history of changes in the hold display can be confirmed through the hold display change effect (success effect).

(I) The means for holding display and the means for active display may be different means. For example, the first image display unit and the second image display unit may configure respective means.

(J) The hold display and the active display may be switched and displayed using the same display area.

(K) With respect to the hold display of the hold stage effect for changing the character as shown in FIGS. 24 and 26B, an example in which the character color does not change is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for the hold display of the hold stage effect, the color of the image may be changed, for example, by changing the color of the character from blue to red in the middle of the hold stage effect. By doing this, the first-type effect in which the blue character changes stepwise, the second-type effect in which the red character changes stepwise, and the red character in the middle of the stepwise change in the blue character In the hold stage effect, a third system effect that changes to a third system and a fourth system effect that changes to a blue color while the red character changes in stages are different from the stepwise change effect of a certain system. Since it is possible to change the system to a stepwise change effect during the effect, it is possible to increase the fun of the effect.

Next, main effects obtained by the above-described embodiment will be described.
(1) When a stepwise change of the display mode of the hold display by the characters A to D in the hold stage effect as shown in FIG. 26(B) and FIGS. 40(A) to (D) is executed, FIG. B) and the active display as shown in FIG. 40E, which displays the characters A to D collectively, is performed, so that the player can confirm the change in the mode of the hold display (that is, the history of the change in the mode). Become.

(2) As described above, the common effect that is commonly executed when the mode of the active display is changed while the variable display is being executed, and the mode of the active display after the common effect is executed. It is possible to execute a success effect that is changed or a failure effect that does not change the aspect, and the ratio of executing the success effect depends on which timing among the plurality of timings during execution of the variable display. Since they are different, it is possible to draw attention to the execution timing of the common effect. Also, by paying attention to the execution timing of the common effect, the player's expectation can be improved.

(3) As shown in the determined ratios of FIGS. 24(C), (D), (F), and (G), this is the ratio at which the hold display changes between the hold display by the red character and the hold display by the blue character. Since the selection ratio with change and the selection ratio without change are different, the interest of the player can be improved by attracting the player's attention to the mode of the hold display.

(4) As shown in FIG. 41(B), FIG. 42(B), etc., in the variable display, when a specific effect such as an effect of super reach is executed, the display area for active display is changed. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention to a specific effect.

(5) In the variable display, when a specific effect such as a super reach effect is executed, by displaying only a part of the active display area AHA as shown in FIG. Part of the display is displayed, or only a part of the collective display of the characters A to D is displayed by reducing the active display area AHA as shown in FIG. 42B. When the production is executed, by changing the display area in which the variable correspondence display is performed in the display mode in which a part of the active display area is displayed, the attention to the active display is reduced and the player is directed to the specific production. Can attract the attention of.

Further, the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, after the game medium has passed through the starting area (for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, etc.) provided in the gaming area, the variable display (for example, special figure Variable display, variable display of decorative design, variable display of special design and decorative design, etc.) Based on the establishment of a start condition, variable display of identification information is executed and a display result (for example, a fixed decorative pattern, When a specific display result is derived and displayed on the variable display means for deriving and displaying a fixed special symbol, etc., a gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine) for controlling to a specific game state advantageous for the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) (1) and the like, and with respect to the variable display of the identification information for which the game medium has passed through the starting area but the variable display start condition is not satisfied, a pending storage means for storing pending information within a predetermined upper limit ( For example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, the first start winning award reception command buffer 194A, the second start winning award reception command buffer 194B, etc.) and the reservation storage means. Hold display means for performing a hold display in a predetermined display mode on each of the hold information (for example, a process of adding a hold display to the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL in the first hold addition process of S162, or S165). Processing for adding a hold display to the second start winning prize memory display area 5HR in the second hold addition processing of No.) and the start condition for the variable display are satisfied, and accordingly, the hold display corresponding to the variable display is performed. A special image showing information including a display during digestion (for example, an active display obtained by moving a hold display corresponding to the variable display to a predetermined active display area AHA, or information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display). Is provided in a predetermined area (for example, the active display area AHA is provided, for example, in the lower central part of the image display device 5. At least the active display AH is displayed in the active display area AHA, and the active display AH is displayed. In addition to the special image display means for displaying in an active display frame AHW surrounding the active display AH and a region including a predetermined range including the active display frame AHW, the special image is displayed during execution of variable display of identification information. Common effect executed when the display mode of the special image is changed and when the display mode of the special image is not changed (for example, in the first system change effect, before the graphic group Y1 collides with the active display). In the production and the second system change production, arrow Y2 Active display frame surrounding the active display) and a success effect that changes the display mode of the special image after executing the common effect (for example, in the first system change effect, the active display frame includes a graphic group). In the production in which any one of the Y1 shapes "star" collides and changes to a star display mode, or in the second system change production, the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame and the line thickness of the active display frame That changes the display mode of the active display or the active display frame by executing both the first system change performance and the second system change performance) or the display mode of the special image. A failure effect that is not allowed (for example, in the first system change effect, an effect that disappears before the figure of any shape “star” of the figure group Y1 collides with the active display and does not change the display mode of the active display, In the system change effect, the effect that the arrow Y2 disappears before the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame and the line thickness of the active display frame does not change, or these first system change effect and second system change effect And an effect display which executes both active display and/or display mode of one or both of the active display frames) and a plurality of timings during execution of variable display of identification information. Of these, the ratio of executing the success effect is different depending on at which timing the common effect is executed.

According to such a configuration, the gaming machine pays attention to the execution timing of the common effect that fuels whether the display mode of the special image representing the information including the display during digestion corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the variable display is changed. Can be made. In addition, the gaming machine can improve the player's expectation by paying attention to the execution timing.

Further, in the gaming machine 1, the plurality of timings at which the common effect may be executed may include before and after the reach display mode forming a part of the specific display result is displayed.

With such a configuration, the gaming machine can improve the player's expectation before and after the reach display mode is displayed (before and after the reach is established).

Further, in the gaming machine 1, the common effect is performed at a second timing after the first timing of the variable display, as compared with a case where the common display is performed at the first timing of the variable display of the identification information being executed. When executed, the success effect may be executed at a higher rate.

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's expectation over a longer period from the first half to the second half of the variable display of the identification information being executed.

Further, in the gaming machine 1, a pre-determination unit that determines whether or not to use the specific display result before deriving and displaying the display result of the variable display (for example, in the process of S412 by the CPU 103, the special figure display result and the number of pending storages). 17 is selected from among the plurality of variation category determination tables shown in FIG. 17, and the variation category is determined based on the selected variation category determination table and the variation category determination random value MR3. Determination processing, in the winning random number determination processing of S220, such as processing for determining the special figure display result and jackpot type), and the holding stored in the holding storage means before the determination of the predetermination means Specific determination means for determining whether or not the display result of the variable display based on the information becomes the specific display result (for example, in the special symbol normal process of S110, the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is “big hit” or “small”). Processing for deciding whether or not to "win" before the variable display result is derived and displayed), and a hold display corresponding to the hold information which is the determination target of the specific determination means, out of a plurality of types. The display device is provided with an effect execution means capable of executing the hold notice effect displayed in any of the display modes, and a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing the suggestion effect indicating whether or not the display mode of the hold display changes. The display mode of the display includes a normal mode, a special mode different from the normal mode, and a first special mode and a second special mode that are modes different from the normal mode and the special mode, and the effect execution means. Is for displaying the hold display corresponding to the hold information that is the determination target of the specific determination means in different ratios in the first special mode or the second special mode according to the determination result of the specific determination means. It is also possible to change and display the hold display in the first special mode or the second special mode at a plurality of timings, and the suggestion effect executing means displays the hold display in the special mode. When it is, the suggestion effect may be executed more frequently than when the hold display is not displayed in the special mode.

According to such a configuration, when the display mode of the hold display is displayed in the special mode, the frequency of execution of the suggestive effect can be increased, so that the player's expectation can be increased.

In the above description, the active display change effect for the active display has been described, but the hold change effect, which is the same effect mode as the active display change effect, is executed for the hold display displayed in the starting winning prize memory display area 5H. May be.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, after the hold display is displayed in the special mode, the above-described common effect is executed as a suggestive effect that suggests a successful effect and a failed effect, so that the execution ratios are different, for example, , May be raised, and after the hold display is displayed in a special mode, a suggestion effect that suggests an active display change effect for the active display corresponding to the hold display (for example, the success effect and the failure effect are commonly executed. For example, the suggestion effect suggesting the common effect) may be increased so that the execution ratios of executing the same effect or different modes are different. In addition, when the display mode of the hold display displayed in the starting prize winning memory display area 5H as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38 is the special mode, the active display change effect is displayed with respect to the hold display displayed in the special mode. For example, the execution ratio of executing the pending change effect executed in the same or different effect mode may be different, for example, may be increased.

In the above description, the main notice effect such as the active display change effect is explained, but if it does not affect the main notice effect, another notice effect such as the main notice effect or the pre-read notice effect is executed with the same change. Alternatively, the main notice effect may be executed with the same change when it does not affect the notice effect such as the other main notice effect or the prefetch notice effect. Here, when there is no effect, when a plurality of notice effects (main notice effect, pre-read notice effect) are executed in the change, the execution time for executing each notice effect is sufficient in the special figure change time of the change. Or when a plurality of notice effects (main notice effect, pre-read notice effect) are executed in the variation, it is difficult for the player to see due to the effect mode of each notice effect.

In the above description, the active display change effect for the active display has been described, but for example, a character with a hammer appears in the hold effect for the hold display, and the effect effect of hitting the first hold display with the hammer is executed. It is a decorative pattern when the display mode of the hold display is changed or when the decorative pattern is composed of a total of 9 kinds of eight kinds of alphanumeric characters "1" to "8" and one character image. It may be an effect mode in which the character pops out of the character image and the effect effect is executed on the hold display of the target.

In the above description, the display mode at the time of addition of the hold display has been described. However, in the case of determining whether to change the display mode of the hold display displayed in the display mode at the time of addition and changing the display mode of the hold display. 24 and 37, the display mode of the hold display may be determined based on the setting example of the display mode determination table of the hold display, and the timing of changing the display mode of the hold display may be determined. The timing of changing the display mode of the hold display may be a predetermined timing such as the next change.

In the above description, as the first system change effect, an effect mode in which the display mode of the active display is changed by a group of figures configured by combining a plurality of figures, and as the second system change effect, the display mode of the active display frame by the arrow Although the presentation mode of changing the is not limited to a figure or an arrow, for example, a presentation mode in which a character or the like appears to change the display mode of the special image including the active display and the active display frame may be used.

In the above description, an example in which the display mode of the additionally displayed hold display (display mode at the time of addition) is white has been described, but as in the setting example by the hold display mode determination table as shown in FIGS. 24 and 37. In addition, for example, the display mode of the hold display is determined so that it is additionally displayed in any of four colors (eg, red, yellow, blue, white) or five colors (eg, red, yellow, blue, white, gray). Alternatively, the display mode of the hold display may be determined so as to be additionally displayed by the display mode of three colors or less or six colors or more, and the display mode of the hold display may be determined by the color of the hold display or the characters or symbols drawn on the hold display The display mode of the hold display may be determined to be displayed, and the display mode of the hold display may be determined to be additionally displayed depending on the shape of the hold display (for example, heart shape, star shape, character type, etc.). Alternatively, the display mode of the hold display may be determined so as to be additionally displayed depending on the movement of the hold display (for example, the motion pattern of the character in the character-type hold display).

In the above description, the active display may be erased from the image display device 5 immediately before the final stop of the decorative design, or the active display may be erased when the variation of the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5L is stopped. Of course, the active display may be erased after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation.

In the above description, after performing the common effect on the active display displayed in the active display area AHA, the display mode of the special image showing the information including the active display corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the variable display. An example of executing a failure effect that does not change the display mode of the special image representing the information including the active effect corresponding to the variable effect and the pending display corresponding to the variable display has been described. After performing a common effect that is commonly executed for both the success effect and the failure effect for any of the hold effects displayed in FIG. 1, the success effect or the hold effect display mode in which the display mode of the hold effect is changed You may execute the failure production which does not change.

In addition, after performing a success effect or a failure effect on any of the hold displays displayed in the starting prize winning memory display area 5H, the hold display becomes the variable display, and the hold display corresponding to the variable display is performed. A success effect or a failure effect may be further executed with respect to the special image showing the information including the active display. In this case, for example, when there is a start winning a prize to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, in step 160 or step 163 in FIG. 23, each of the hold displays displayed in the starting winning memory display area 5H is displayed. On the other hand, the success/failure effect execution/non-execution for the hold display, the effect mode, the execution timing for executing the effect, the display mode of the hold display, etc. are determined according to the variation category, and the active display corresponding to each hold display is determined. When the special image showing the information including the active display, the success/failure effect is executed, the effect mode, the display mode of the special display, etc. are determined according to the variation category and the like, as shown in FIG. The determination content may be stored in the first prefetching notice buffer 194C and the second prefetching notice buffer 194D.

In the above description, as an example, the second system change effect of the effect mode by the arrow Y2 on which the character “intense heat” is drawn has been described, but the character may not be drawn on the arrow Y2, and other characters may be used. May be drawn, or a character or the like may be drawn. In addition, when there are a plurality of types of effect forms as the second system change effect, the success effect is determined depending on which of the second system change effects the effect mode of the second system change effect is selected. The degree of expectation of execution may be different. Further, the second system change effect may be an effect that suggests the display mode of the special image after the successful effect execution, by the effect mode of the second system change effect.

Next, modifications and characteristic points of the embodiment described above will be listed below.
(1) Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described above, various types of device including the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the process shown in the flowchart, and the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5 are described. The production operation and the like can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

(2) When the display mode of the active display displayed in the active display area AHA is a special mode, the hold change effect is executed for any of the hold displays displayed in the starting winning prize memory display area 5H. Of course, if any of the hold displays displayed in the starting prize winning memory display area 5H has a hold display that is displayed in a special manner, any of the hold displays displayed in the starting winning prize memory display area 5H or the active display Alternatively, the pending change effect or the active display change effect may be executed.

(3) Either the first system change effect or the second system change effect may be an effect that changes the color of the active display in the display mode of the active display. In this case, for example, like the first system change effect that changes the shape and the second system change effect that changes the thickness of the line of the active display frame, it is displayed in the hold display displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H. The display mode of the active display so that the display mode is a color having a higher expectation of a big hit than the color of the hold display (for example, yellow or red in the case of the hold display displayed in blue) You can change the color at.

(4) FIGS. 27(A) to 27(A) to FIG. 27(A) to FIG. A setting example of the determination rate of the effect mode set as in 27 (C) may be used, and the success effect for the active display is executed by the color of the active display included in the special image displayed in the active display area AHA. It is also possible to use a setting example of the determination rate of the display mode set so that the determination rate of the display mode of the active display such as the color of the active display after the setting is different.

(5) For example, in the example of setting the determination ratio by the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table in FIG. 26, the ratio of “execution” and “no execution” of the active display change effect of the variation pattern “PA4-X” is set. , 45% (the sum of the first system change effect 15%, the second system change effect 10%, the first system change effect and the second system change effect 20%) vs. 55%, "execution available" and "no execution" 26" may be set, and the ratio of "executed" and "not executed" is 0% vs. 100% as in the variation pattern "PA1-X" in FIG. The ratio according to the embodiment may be set such that any one of the plurality is set as 0%.

(6) In the probability variation control, a specific area may be provided in advance in the special winning opening, and the gaming machine may be controlled to the probability variation state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific area. For example, based on the jackpot type determination random number value MR2, a game ball enters a specific area within the special winning opening by being assigned to a plurality of types of jackpot types such as "non-probable variation", "probable variation", and "probability". It may be a gaming machine that controls the gaming state to an easy one and controls the gaming ball to a probability changing state based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through this specific area.

(7) In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the process shown in the flowchart, various performance operations including the performance image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, and the like of the present invention. Any changes and modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the invention.

(8) A game score for use in a game is given and given by using a frequency that is a game value of a size specified by information recorded on a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by using a game score or a game score given by a prize for a game to hit a game ball enclosed in the game machine into a game area.

That is, based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the starting area provided in the game area, a variable display means is provided for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified, and deriving and displaying the display result. This is a gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed on the display means. However, when the gaming score is not 0, the gaming score is used in the gaming machine. The game is performed by hitting the game ball enclosed in the game area, the game score is subtracted according to the hitting of the game ball, and the game ball is won in accordance with the winning area provided in the game area. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that adds points. Such a game machine has a game recording medium insertion slot for inserting a game recording medium in which information capable of specifying the magnitude of the game value that can be used for adding game scores is inserted, and a game recording medium. A game recording medium processing means for reading the record information recorded in the game recording medium inserted into the medium insertion opening may be provided.

(9) In the above description, in order to notify the variation control pattern (the production control CPU 120) of the variation pattern indicating the variation time and the variation mode such as the type of reach production and the presence or absence of pseudo-relation, when the variation is started. Although an example of transmitting one fluctuation pattern command is shown, the fluctuation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103) determines whether the first command indicates whether or not there is a pseudo-relation, whether or not there is a sliding effect, and the like before reaching (when not reaching). To the so-called second stop time) and a command indicating the variation mode, and the second command indicates the type of the reach and the presence/absence of the re-lottery effect, etc. after reaching the reach (when the reach is not reached). May transmit a command indicating a variation time or a variation mode after the so-called second stop). In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform effect control in the variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of the two commands. It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 100 notifies the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the concrete fluctuation mode executed at each timing is selected by the effect control microcomputer. Good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined time has passed after sending the first command (for example, the next timer interrupt). (In) the second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. By thus notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern command can be reduced.

(10) The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, and It may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device included in a computer device or the like. Furthermore, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

(11) The game execution mode is not limited to that executed by mounting a removable recording medium, but by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executable or may be directly executed by using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

(12) In the above-described embodiment, the “ratio (ratio, probability)” is illustrated, but the “ratio (ratio, probability)” is not limited to this, and is, for example, a value within the range of 0% to 100%. Of these, a value including 0%, a value including 100%, and a value not including 0% and 100% may be used.

(13) In the above-described embodiment, an example of the probability variation state control is shown in which the variation display result is derived and displayed as the probability variation big hit, and after the big hit game state ends, the probability variation state is unconditionally controlled to the probability variation state. However, not limited to this, when the detection means detects that the game ball has passed a specific region provided in the special winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7, the probability variation determining device is controlled to the probability variation state. The type of probable variation state control may be performed.

(14) It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplifications in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the scope of the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the scope of the claims and all modifications within the scope.

1 Pachinko gaming machine, 151A 1st special figure reservation storage section, 151B 2nd special figure reservation storage section, 194A 1st start winning prize reception command buffer, 194B 2nd starting prize reception command buffer, 5 image display device, 102 RAM 5HL 1st starting winning prize memory display area, 5HR 2nd starting winning prize memory display area, 120 effect control CPU, Y1 figure group, Y2 arrow, AHA active display area.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that displays variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
Hold storage means for storing, as a hold storage, information related to variable display that has not been started yet,
Hold display means capable of displaying a hold display corresponding to the hold storage stored by the hold storage means,
Hold mode changing means capable of changing the mode of the hold display before the variable display based on the target hold storage is executed,
Corresponding display means capable of performing a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display during execution of the variable display,
During the execution of the variable display, a common effect that is commonly executed when the mode of the corresponding display is changed and when the mode of the corresponding display is not changed, and the mode of the corresponding display after the common effect is executed. and a demonstration execution unit capable of executing succeeding game effect or said not to change the mode of the corresponding display failure game to change the,
The effect execution means,
One of the plurality of timings including the first timing during the execution of the one variable display and the second timing subsequent to the first timing, the success effect is set according to which timing the common effect is executed. The rate of execution is different,
When the common effect is executed at the second timing, the success effect is executed at a higher rate than when the common effect is executed at the first timing.
The correspondence display means can perform the correspondence display in a plurality of modes including a normal mode and a special mode different from the normal mode as the correspondence display,
When the corresponding display of the special embodiment is performed, wherein the common effect is Ru runs at a higher rate than when the corresponding display of the normal mode is performed, the gaming machine.